Advisor Master

Programming Guide

P/N 1070480 • REV 3.0 • ISS 06OCT11

 Copyright © 2011 UTC Fire & Security. All rights reserved.
Trademarks and Interlogix, Advisor Master name and logo are trademarks of
patents UTC Fire & Security.
Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the
respective products.
Manufacturer UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc.
1275 Red Fox Rd., Arden Hills, MN 55112-6943, USA
Authorized EU manufacturing representative:
UTC Fire & Security B.V.
Kelvinstraat 7, 6003 DH Weert, Netherlands
Certification

EN 50131-1 System requirements

EN 50131-3 Control and indicating equipment
EN 50131-6 Power Supplies
EN 50136-1-1 General requirements for alarm transmission systems
EN 50136-2-1 General requirements for alarm transmission
equipment
IP transmission path via module ATS1801 and ATS1809: ATS 5 (D4,
M4, T4, S2, I3)
Security Grade 3, Environmental class II
Tested and certified by Telefication B.V.
European Union 1999/5/EC (R&TTE directive): Hereby, UTC Fire & Security
directives declares that this device is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
2002/96/EC (WEEE directive): Products marked with this symbol
cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European
Union. For proper recycling, return this product to your local supplier
upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or dispose of it at
designated collection points. For more information see:
www.recyclethis.info.
Contact information www.utcfireandsecurity.com or www.interlogix.com
Customer support www.interlogix.com/customer-support
Content

Programming sequence 1
Basic set up 1
Advanced set up 2

How to program the options 4

Accessing the installer programming menu 4
Programming the menu options 5
First startup 6
Siren calibration 6

1-Zone database 7
Zone number 7
Zone settings 7

2-Area database 29
Select the area to program 29
Area settings 29

3-RAS database 39
RAS to be polled 39
Select RAS to program 39
RAS settings 39

4-DGP database 48
DGPs to be polled 48
DGP settings 49

5-Alarm groups 50
Alarm group number 50
Alarm group settings 52

6-Timers 62
Timer settings 62

7-System options 70
Configuring system options 70

8-Auto reset 93
Auto reset settings 93

9-Communication options 94
Configuring communication options 94

10-Program text 103

Program text words 103

Advisor Master Programming Guide i

 Word library 105

11-Version 111
Select device 111

12-LED test 112

13-Timezones 113
Select timezone 114
Timezone settings 114

14-Defaults 116
Select default option 116

15-Alarm group restrictions 118

Alarm group restriction options 118
Restriction number 120
Configuring alarm restriction 120

16-Event to output 124

Output number 124
Configuring event to output 124

17-Auto arm/disarm 126

Auto arm/disarm program 126
Configuring auto arm/disarm 126
Using alarm group restrictions in conjunction with auto
arm/disarm 127

18-Vaults 129

19-Area linking 130

Linking areas 130

20-System codes 131

System code settings 131

21-Zone shunts 133

Shunt timer number 133
Shunt options 133

22-Timezone to follow output 137

Select timezone 137

23-Poll errors 138

Select device type 138

24-Download to remote device 139

Select download option 139

ii Advisor Master Programming Guide

 25-Display last card 140

26-Reserved menu 140

27-Reserved menu 140

28-To remote devices 141

Select the device type 141
Select the device to program 141

29-Computer connection 142

Computer connection settings 142

30-Printer 148
Printer settings 148

31-Battery testing 150

Select battery test program 150
Programming battery test 150
Select battery test 151

32-Custom LCD message 152

33-Program next service 153

Maintenance date 153
Maintenance message 153

34-Program system event flags 154

System event flag settings 154

35-Program macro logic 160

Program number 160
Configuring program 161

36 to 41-Reserved menus 163

42-Reporting class database 164

Select the reporting class 164
Class settings 164

43-Test calls 166

Test call settings 166

44 to 49-Reserved menus 166

50-Channel mapping 167

Inputs 167
Areas 167
System 167

Advisor Master Programming Guide iii

 51-Engineering reset 169

52-Voice reporting 170

Reporting code no. 170
Voice message no. 171
Voice message description (optional) 171

53-Program DVMRe 172

DVMRe alarm handling via the printer port 172
High Level Interface (HLI) control flags 172
RAS permission 174

54-Test zone 175

55-Reserved 177

56-Siren calibration 178

Event Flags 179

Reporting 182

Troubleshooting 195
ATS control panel - model ATS1000/2000/3000/4000/4500 195
LCD arming stations - models ATS1100, ATS1105 196
4 LED arming station - models ATS1150 and ATS1155 196
Data gathering panels - models ATS1201, ATS1210, ATS1211,
ATS1220 197
Serial printer interface - model ATS1802 198
Output devices - models ATS1810, ATS1811, ATS1820 198

Options required by EN 50131 compliance 200

RAS options required by EN 50131 compliance 202

Additional functions 203

Additional zone types 204

EN 50131 Grade 3 certified components 205

Glossary 207

Index 211

Programming map 220

iv Advisor Master Programming Guide

Programming sequence
Advisor Master is a versatile control panel with many options to set up the
system with necessary requirements. When programming it is easy to lose track
if one does not use a good method. Using a good method also provides for an
efficient way of programming.

Basic set up
The basic set up involves all settings to put an ATS control panel with the most
common programming in operation.
1. Draw the floor plan and label all zones, equipment, areas etc. Use
programming sheets to fill out all information.
2. Default the control panel (see Installation guide and Quick programming
guide). See also “14-Defaults” on page 116.
3. Change the Master Engineer Code using user menu 14, Program Users.
4. Set the correct time and date using user menu 15, Time and Date.
5. Program specific words that are not in the library using menu 10-Program
text.
6. If any automatic procedure (like auto arm/disarm) is required or users only
should have access during certain periods, program timezones using menu
13-Timezones.
7. Program the area options like Area Names and entry/exit times using menu 2-
Area database.
8. Set up the required alarm groups using menu 5-Alarm groups.
9. Program the RAS connected. First activate polling. Then program the
necessary detail for any specific RAS using menu 3-RAS database.
10. When DGP are connected, activate polling and set the DGP type using menu
4-DGP database.
11. Program the necessary zone details like zone type, zone name and reporting
options using menu 1-Zone database.
12. Program the dialler details using menu 9-Communication options.
13. Set the required reporting options using menu 42-Reporting class database.
14. Program the test call details using menu 43-Test calls.
15. Program users in user menu 14, Program Users.
16. Map any event to outputs as required using menu 16-Event to output.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 1

Advanced set up
The above steps are required to set up any basic system. Items that are not
required can be skipped. Additionally the following items can be programmed:
1. In most cases assigning more then one area to a zone is used to program
common areas. For special common area functions like being able to only
disarm the common area, area linking is required. Program area linking using
menu 19-Area linking.
2. When under certain conditions only restricted access should be available to
users, alarm group restrictions can be required. Program restrictions for alarm
groups using menu 15-Alarm group restrictions.
3. In case timed disarm is necessary to only allow disarming for a certain
amount of time, the disarmed time has to be programmed using menu 6-
Timers.
4. For automatic arming/disarming program 17-Auto arm/disarm.
5. Program additional system options using menu 7-System options.
6. Program up/download facilities using menu 29-Computer connection.
7. If an extensive battery testing is required use program menu 31-Battery
testing.
8. Program necessary system event flags using menu 34-Program system event
flags.
9. If a printer is connected, program the printer settings using menu 30-Printer.
10. When outputs are required to activate Timezones program menu 22-
Timezone to follow output.
11. Program the necessary macro logic in menu 35-Program macro logic.
12. Program the custom LCD text in menu 32-Custom LCD message.
13. When areas in alarm should be reset automatically, program menu 8-Auto
reset.
14. Program vault areas using menu 18-Vaults.
15. Program remote devices like the ATS1170 (one door RAS) or ATS1250 (four
door/four lift DGP) using menu 28-To remote devices.
16. Program the required system codes for access control using menu 20-System
codes.
17. When zones should be shunted on access using access control devices like
the AST1170, program menu 21-Zone shunts.
18. Set the next service date (if required) in menu 33-Program next service.

2 Advisor Master Programming Guide

If the programming of the system is done, the system has to be tested. Menus
providing support in testing are:

Table 1: User menus

1. Panel status Provides system information.
2. Active zones Shows zones not in normal state (e.g. active or tampered).
3. Zones in alarm Shows any zone in alarm.
4. Inhibited zones Shows any inhibited zone.
5. History Lists all events that occured.
6. Test report Use this menu to perform an arm or disarm test.
10. Inhibit zone Inhibit any zone.
11. Uninhibit zone Uninhibit any zone previously inhibited.
12. Test zone Test any individual zone.
13. Start Auto Disarm test Use this menu to perform an auto disarm test.
16. Isolate/De-isolate RAS/DGP Isolate or de-isolate any RAS or DGP.
22. Open door Open a door for the programmed unlock time.
23. Unlock, Lock, Disable or Using this menu doors can be unlocked until locked again
Enable Doors with this menu. Disable or enable doors.

Table 2: Installer menus

11. Version number Verify version numbers for the control panel, any RAS or
DGP.
12. LED test Activate all LED’s on all RAS’s.
14. Reset to Default If required, all settings or only a part can be reset to factory
defaults.
23. Poll errors Use this option to view if communication errors occured on
the system databus.
25. Display card Display the system code and CARD ID when using the 1-door
RAS’s like the ATS1170.
31. Battery testing Test DGP batteries.
56. Siren calibration Verify the siren connection, and align the activation
parameters.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 3

How to program the options
For information on which keys to use while programming, please refer to these
pages.

Accessing the installer programming menu

The ATS system is programmed from the Installer programming menu. Before
accessing the programming menu, the system manager must first disarm the
system.
Note: Depending on system options, an additional authorization can be required.
For more details, see:
• “Installer dual code” on page 84.
• “PIN of the day option” on page 89.
See also Advisor Master Manager Manual.

How to access the installer programming menu:

1. Start with this LCD display:

There Are No Alarms In This Area

Code:

2. Press Menu and enter 01278 (Master Engineer code), and then press Enter.
The following display appears:

0- Exit, ENTER- Down, *- Up

0-Exit, Menu:

Note: There is a prompt to apply EN 50131 default settings during the first
startup. See “First startup” on page 6 for more details.
3. Press 19 and Enter.
The following display appears:

Simple/Advanced Menu
*-Advanced

4. Press Enter to access the Simple Menu (or press * to access the Advanced
Menu).
The following display appears:

Installer Programming
0-Exit, Menu:

You can now select the menu option you want to program. See “Programming
map” on page 220 for the programming map that lists all the menu options
available in the Programming menu.

4 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Note: The chapter and section numbering in the manual follow the menu option
numbering. For example, Chapter 1 describes menu 1 “Zone database”.
You can easily move between the menu options by pressing the following keys:

Enter or # or  To scroll forwards one menu option at a time.

Menu or * or  To scroll backwards one menu option at a time.
Menu number and Enter or # To jump directly to the menu option.
0 and Enter or # Exit the Programming menu and return to the User menu.

Different keys with the same function:

Enter or # These keys have the same function. [#] is used on LED keypads
or 40 character LCD keypad (ATS115x or ATS112x).
Menu or * These keys have the same meaning. [*] is used on LED keypads
or 40 character LCD keypads (ATS115x or ATS112x).

Programming the menu options

What the LCD display tells you
The LCD display on the keypad has two lines of characters. Each line presents
different information.

1: Office 4 Door 20 Contact -System information

- Instructions and the characters you
Text Word: can enter on the keypad

Programming the menu options

Once you have selected the menu option you want to program, most options can
be programmed using a standard procedure, shown below in How to program.

How to program
The method of programming depends on the options to be programmed. Some
options require a value, others require a Yes/No setting.

How to program values

• ?, Enter: Enter the new information and press the Enter key.
• Enter: Press the Enter key again to save the displayed information and move
to the next menu option display.

How to program Yes/No options

• Menu: Press the Menu key to toggle between options.
• Enter: Press the Enter key to save the displayed information and move to the
next menu option display.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 5

Note: Some programming options allow multiple values to be entered, for
example, Assigning areas to zones. In these cases, enter the value and press
Enter to add or delete the option.
Some programming menus need certain values to be entered, while others are
used to select Yes/No. Programming lines containing Yes/No options often also
allow the 0 key to be pressed. Use this key to skip a number of options. The
display will indicate if the 0 key can be used on the second line.
Programming menus like “Poll RAS”, “Poll DGP” or “Entry time” show the status
of the current values. To update the values, press Menu.
Where programming of an option does not follow this procedure, the (additional)
keys available are described in the How to program section of the option.

First startup
During the first startup of the panel, after the installer enters the programming
menu, he is prompted to apply EN 50131 default settings.

Use EN Gr3 defaults?

*-No #-Yes

Press # to apply the EN 50131 compliant settings. See “Options required by EN

50131 compliance” on page 200 for more details.
Note: Sirens must be calibrated separately. See “Siren calibration” below for
more details.
Press * to cancel. The prompt will repeat during 1 hour after the first startup.

Siren calibration
For EN 50131 regulation compliance the system must provide monitoring for
sirens and strobes. This monitoring is only possible after siren calibration.
The installer must perform siren calibration manually from keypad using
programming menu “56-Siren calibration” (see Adviros Master Programming
Guide for more details).

Caution: Siren calibration is not performed automatically when applying

EN 50131 default settings using menu 14 or during the first startup.

6 Advisor Master Programming Guide

1-Zone database
Zone Database
Zone:

In this programming section all parameters are programmed regarding the zones.
Each zone is a physical input on the control panel, a DGP or a plug-in expander.

Zone number
Select the appropriate zone number to program. Every zone has a number
between 1 and 256, depending on the location in the system.
Note: A list of zone numbers can be found with the Advisor Master Installation
Guide.

Zone settings
Zone type

1: Type 3; Entry Exit Alarm

Type

The zone type determines exactly how the zone will function in given
circumstances. Each zone type will behave differently. Most zone types require
an area, but zone types that affect the status of areas (zone types 6, 31, 34, 35)
need alarm groups.

Caution: The zone type is important and influences much of the remaining
programming and functions of the system. Consequently, you must take
considerable care when programming zone types.

Armed or disarmed
Armed or disarmed apply to the status of an area. If an area is armed, certain
zone types will go into alarm when the zone is activated. Other zone types only
go into alarm when the area is disarmed.

Tamper alarms
When the dual zone option (see “7-System options”, page 70) is set to Yes, a
short or open circuit on most zone types will generate a tamper alarm. If set to
No, an open or short circuit is the same as an activated zone.
Zone types that are not used to generate alarms do not generate tamper alarms,
e.g. technical or camera zone types.

Entry/exit times
Where entry/exit times are referred to, the time used is the longest entry/exit time
programmed for any of the areas assigned to the zone.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 7

Note: Camera count zone types (23 to 26 and 36 to 39) must always be
connected directly to the ATS control panel zones and not to DGP zones.

Table 3: Zone types

Zone type Description
0. No zone type Does not generate any alarm.
programmed
1. Disarmed alarm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed and reports it
to the central station.
Generates no alarm if the area is armed.
Example: Hold-up button.
2. Armed alarm Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Internal door, PIR (movement detector).
3. Entry/Exit Alarm Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
When the area is armed, the exit timer starts and activating
the zone will generate no alarm. If the zone is activated and
the exit time has expired, the entry timer starts. When the
entry time has expired, an alarm will be generated.
The zone has to be closed when arming the area.
Example: Front door.
You need to program the entry/exit time. See “2-Area
database” on page 29 for more information.
4. Access zone Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed and the exit timer
for the zone has expired and the entry timer is not running.
The zone has to be closed when arming the area.
Example: PIR at entrance.
You need to program the entry/exit time. See “2-Area
database” on page 29 for more information.
5. 24 Hour Alarm Generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area.
Example: Panel tampers, fire, panic alarm
6. Pulsed Keyswitch When the zone switches from normal state to active, the
functions of the programmed alarm group are performed.
Example: Keyswitch next to Front door.
You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm groups”,
page 50).
7. Camera Suspicion Zone When this zone is activated, cameras in the areas that are
assigned to the zone will be activated.
When the zone de-activates, the cameras continue to operate
for the programmed suspicion time.
Example: Suspicion button.
You need to program the Suspicion Time. See “6-Timers” on
page 62 for more information.

8 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Zone type Description
8. Dis. delay/Arm Gen. Alm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not
report it to the central station until the delayed alarm timer has
expired or a second delayed alarm is activated.
Generates a general burglar alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Hold-up button on a counter where more than one
hold-up button is used.
You need to program the Disarmed Alarm Delay Time. See
“6-Timers” on page 62 for more information.
9. Reset Delayed Zones Resets a delayed alarm type if the zone switches to normal
state.
Resets a delayed alarm type if the delay timer is still running
(therefore a full alarm has not been activated).
Stops cameras from operating if the zone is activated, but the
delayed time continues to run.
Example: Reset button for quick cancellation of alarm.
Delayed zone types are: 8, 11, 22, and 40.
10. Do not use
11. Dis. Delay Alarm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not
report it until the delayed alarm timer has expired or a second
delayed alarm is activated.
Generates no alarm if the area is armed.
Example: Hold-up button.
You need to program the Delayed Alarm Time. See “6-
Timers” on page 62 for more information.
12. Restart Exit Timer A pulsed keyswitch that resets the entry timers and restarts
the exit timers for all areas assigned to the zone.
Example: Keyswitch next to door.
You need to program the correct area(s).
13. Entry/Exit No Arm Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Check
When the area is armed, the exit timer starts and activating
the zone will generate no alarm. If the zone is activated and
the exit time has expired, the entry timer starts. When the exit
time has expired, an alarm will be generated.
The zone may be activated when arming the area.
Example: Contact on frontdoor.
You need to program the Entry Exit Time. See “2-Area
database” on page 29 for more information.
14. Access No Arm Check Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed and no entry/exit
timer for the area is active.
The zone may be activated when arming the area.
Example: PIR in hallway.
You need to program the Entry Exit Time. See “2-Area
database” on page 29 for more information.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 9

 Zone type Description
15. Firedoor Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed.
Automatically activates an audible alert on arming stations
assigned to the same areas (regardless of the event flag
programming). The only event flag activated (as specified in
the zone database) is the zone event flag.
This local alarm can be reset by entering "Enter, Enter, 0,
Enter" or "user code, Off, area, Enter" on the arming station to
stop the audible alert and cancel the event.
If the zone remains activated, it generates a new local alarm
after the programmed local alarm reminder time.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Firedoors or emergency doors.
You need to program the local alarm reminder time. See “6-
Timers” on page 62 for more information.
16. 24Hr Local Mains Fail It is not used in standard commercial versions of the ATS
control panel. It generates a local alarm, and activates an
audible alert.
17. Do not use
18. Report Fail Generates a local alarm. Activates an audible alert on arming
stations assigned to the same areas.
Activates fault LED on all arming stations and generates LCD
fault display message.
19. Report Fail LED Activates fault LED on all arming stations and generates LCD
fault display message.
20. Zone to Event Flag 24Hr When activated, opened or shorted, it only activates the zone
event flag.
Example: Doorbell.
21. Firedoor With User Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does
Code not report it to the central station, no audible alert on arming
stations.
This alarm can only be acknowledged by entering "user code,
Off, area, Enter" on the arming station.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Fire door or emergency door.
22. Dis. Delay Reset/Arm Generates an alarm when the area is disarmed but does not
Alm report to a central station until the delayed alarm timer has
expired or a second delayed alarm is activated.
If the zone closes to normal state during the delayed time, it
resets automatically.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Hold-up button.
You need to program the delayed alarm time. See “6-Timers”
on page 62 for more information.

10 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Zone type Description
23. Camera 1 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 1 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used with zones on the ATS control panel.
24. Camera 2 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 2 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used with zones on the ATS control panel.
25. Camera 3 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 3 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used with zones on the ATS control panel.
26. Camera 4 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 4 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used with zones on the ATS control panel.
27. Technical with Report When the zone is activated, opened or shorted, it reports to
the central station. A restore is send when the zone de-
activates
Example: Temperature alarm on freezer
28. Armed Alarm with Reset Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed. Resets
automatically when the zone closes to normal state.
Example: Latching glassbreak detector.
29. 24-Hour Alarm with Generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area.
Reset Resets automatically when the zone closes to normal state.
Example: Latching glassbreak detector or smoke detector.
30. Firedoor with Reset Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does
not report it to the central station.
This alarm can only be acknowledged by entering "user code,
Off, area, Enter" on the arming station. If the zone closes to
normal state, the alarm is reset.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
Example: Firedoor or emergency door.
31. Latching Keyswitch Used to arm or disarm areas. When the zone switches to:
• Active, the areas arm.
• Normal state, the areas disarm.
This zone type uses an alarm group to perform the
arm/disarm functions.
Example: Latching keyswitch to arm or disarm areas.
You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm groups”,
page 50).
32. Armed Zone to Event Does not perform any action when the area is disarmed.
Flag
Activates the zone event flag when the area is armed.
Example: Temperature alarm on freezer activates buzzers.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 11

 Zone type Description
33. 24Hr Alarm & Inhibit This zone type requires different wiring. The zone can have
the following states:
• Shorted: generates an alarm
• Normal: no alarm
• Active: inhibit (no alarms generated)
• Open: tamper alarm
Example: Designed for shopping centres where only one zone
is available for each shop. A keyswitch is used to inhibit the
zone.
34. Area Dis/AlmGrp Restr. A latching keyswitch that has a special function:
Arm
Switching from normal state to active starts the warning time
for the alarm group restriction assigned to the alarm group.
When the warning time expires, the area arms.
Switching from active to normal state disarms the areas.
Example: A keyswitch in a large building with indication that
the area is going to arm.
You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm groups”,
page 50), alarm group restrictions (see “15-Alarm group
restrictions”, page 118), and a warning time (see “6-Timers”,
page 62).
35. Area AlmGrp Restr Arm A latching keyswitch that has a special function:
Only
Switching from normal state to active starts the warning time
for the alarm group restriction assigned to the alarm group.
When the warning time expires, the area arms.
Switching from active to normal state does not perform any
action.
Example: a keyswitch in a large building with indication that
the area is going to arm.
You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm groups”,
page 50), alarm group restrictions (see “15-Alarm group
restrictions”, page 118), and a warning time (see “6-Timers”,
page 62).
36. Camera 5 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 5 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used for zones on the ATS control panel.
37. Camera 6 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 6 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used for zones on the ATS control panel.
38. Camera 7 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 7 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used for zones on the ATS control panel.

12 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Zone type Description
39. Camera 8 Count Used to increment the film counter for camera 8 by
connecting a normally open contact across the zone. The
counter increments if the zone switches from open to short.
Can only be used for zones on the ATS control panel.
40. Dis. Susp. Delay/Arm If the area is disarmed it has the following functions:
Alm • Shorted: Activates cameras in the areas that are assigned
to the zone. When the zone switches back to normal, the
cameras continue to operate for the suspicion time.
• Normal: No alarm.
• Active: Generates an alarm but does not report to the
central station until the delayed alarm timer has expired or
a second delayed alarm is activated.
• Open: Tamper
Generates a general burglar alarm when the area is armed.
Note: You need to program the Delayed Alarm Time. See “6-
Timers” on page 62 for more information.
41. Entry/Exit Firedoor Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed.
Automatically activates an audible alert on arming stations
assigned to the same areas (regardless of the event flag
programming). The only event flag activated is the zone event
flag.
This local alarm can be reset by entering "Enter, Enter, 0,
Enter" or "user code, Off, area, Enter" on the arming station to
stop the audible alert and cancel the event.
If the zone remains activated, it generates a new local alarm
after the programmed local alarm reminder time.
When the area is armed, the exit timer starts and activating
the zone will generate no alarm. If the zone is activated and
the exit time has expired, the entry timer starts. When the exit
time has expired, an alarm will be generated.
Example: A firedoor that is also used to enter the premises.
Note: You need to program the entry/exit timer (see “2-Area
database”, page 29), and the local alarm reminder time (see
“6-Timers”, page 62).
42. Entry/Exit Firedoor w Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does
Code not report it to the central station.
This alarm can only be acknowledged by entering "user code,
Off, area, Enter" on the arming station.
When the area is armed, the exit timer starts and activating
the zone will generate no alarm. If the zone is activated and
the exit time has expired, the entry timer starts. When the exit
time has expired, an alarm will be generated.
Example: A firedoor that is also used to enter the premises.
Note: You need to program the entry/exit timer. See “2-Area
database” on page 29 for more information.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 13

 Zone type Description
43. Disarm Zone to Event Activates the zone event when the area is disarmed.
Flag
Does not perform any action when the area is armed.
Example: Opening a closet activates a buzzer.
44. Firedoor with AlmGrp Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but does
Restr. not report it to the central station.
This alarm can only be acknowledged by entering "user code,
Off, area, Enter" on the arming station
Generates an alarm when the area is armed but the zone can
be disabled when two users with alarm group restrictions
have entered their user code (not necessarily in the same
area).
Example: Fire door or emergency door.
Note: You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm
groups”, page 50) and alarm group restrictions (see “15-Alarm
group restrictions”, page 118).
45. (Event Flag/Arm.Alm) Activates the zone event when the area is disarmed.
Restr.
Generates an alarm when the area is armed, but the zone can
be disabled if two users with alarm group restrictions have
entered their user code (not necessarily in the same area).
Note: You need to program alarm groups (see “5-Alarm
groups”, page 50) and alarm group restrictions (see “15-Alarm
group restrictions”, page 118).
46. Disarm Alm/Arm Gen. Generates an alarm if the area is disarmed.
Alm
Generates a general burglar alarm if the area is armed.
47. Dis. Alm Susp/Arm Gen. When disarmed generates an alarm and activates the
Alm cameras. When the zone closes to normal state, the cameras
continue to operate for the suspicion time.
Generates a general alarm if the area is armed.
48. Camera 1 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 1 is out of film
49. Camera 2 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 2 is out of film.
50. Camera 3 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 3 is out of film.
51. Camera 4 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 4 is out of film.
52. Camera 5 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 5 is out of film.
53. Camera 6 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 6 is out of film.
54. Camera 7 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 7 is out of film.
55. Camera 8 Film Out Generates an alarm when camera 8 is out of film.

14 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Zone type Description
56. Firedoor if No TZ 41 If timezone 41 is invalid, the zone has the following function:
• Generates a local alarm when the area is disarmed but
does not report it to the central station.
• This alarm can only be acknowledged by entering "user
code, Off, area, Enter" on the arming station.
• Generates an alarm when the area is armed.
If timezone 41 is valid, the zone is disabled.
Example: Fire door or emergency door.
Note: You need to program the local alarm reminder time
(see “6-Timers”, page 62) and to link timezone 41 to an output
(see “16-Event to output”, page 124).
57. Technical Report & When the zone is activated or tampered, it reports to the
Screen central station and puts the zone event text on the display. A
restore is sent when the zone switches to normal state.
Example: Temperature alarm on freezer
Note: You need to program the zone event text. See “7-
System options” on page 70.
58. Technical Screen When the zone is activated, opened or shorted, it puts the
zone event text on the display.
Example: Temperature alarm on freezer
Note: You need to program the zone event text. See “7-
System options” on page 70.
59. 24 Hour Alarm If No If timezone 41 is invalid, the zone has the following function:
TZ 41
Generates an alarm regardless of the status of the area.
If timezone 41 is valid, the zone is disabled.
Note: You need to program the local alarm reminder time
(see “6-Timers”, page 62) and to link timezone 41 to an output
(see “16-Event to output”, page 124).
60. Exit Terminator This zone type is used to terminate an exit time. If the zone
switches from active to normal, the exit time will be terminated
and the areas are completely armed.
61. Do not use
62. Do not use
63. Do not use
64. Do not use
65. Engineering reset switch This zone type allows you to perform an engineer reset via an
input.
Note: You need to program the correct area to perform the
reset.
66. Final door set This zone type is used to shorten the exit timer when the
sensor associated with this input is activated, normally on an
exit door. When activated, it shortens the exit timer to 4
seconds.(If ~ is needed, set the Exit Time to 0)

Advisor Master Programming Guide 15

 Zone type Description
67. Latched detector This zone type has a 24 hour alarm that can be isolated and
associated with a latched detector event flag (see “Latched
reset event flag” on page 33).It is normally used for latched
fire detectors.
68. Antimask detector Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed.
Gives a special indication for remote diagnostic purposes.
Example: Antimask detector.
During remote diagnostics, this zone if armed will be indicated
as an antimask alarm.
69. Alarm (ACPO) zone Generates no alarm when the area is disarmed
Generates an alarm when the area is armed. It is inhibited
during the entry exit timed periods.
The zone must be closed when arming the area.
70. Keybox This zone type is linked to the KeyBox timer. It acts as a 24-
hour alarm. When the KeyBox zone is active (KeyBox door/lid
will not be opened during exit or KeyBox timer), it reports an
alarm to the ARC.
71. Lock monitor The input is primarily used to prevent area arming when in a
not sealed state.
72. GVE zone The purpose of this input is to signal a verified spiritual
(Geistliche) User identification (e.g. valid PIN), which is the
first step in disarming sequence.
73, 74. Request to arm / disarm The zone type can be a latching or pulsed type.
Functionality is equal to existing zone key switch types with
the difference:
• Arm / disarm needs to be reversed (4.7 kΩ = arm, 9.4 kΩ
is disarm).
• It needs to be supervised and a tamper shall be reported
as a regular zone tamper.
75. PA alarm Panic alarm zone type.
76. VdS tamper zone For VdS a tamper zone type is required with the following
behaviour.
Disarmed Flags: Reporting to CS, Keypad buzzer, EF 13
(Internal Siren).
Armed Flags: Reporting to CS, EF 1 (External Siren), EF 2
(Strobe).
77. Line fault monitoring When external alarm transmission device failure occurs.
When only one zone type 77 is defined and this zone will be
active during arming (or all zones when there are multiple
type 77 zones) it will indicate to the user this zone condition
and it will prevent the user for arming.

16 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Zone type Description
78. Audible PA The audible panic alarm adopts the same functionality as the
silent panic alarm, with the exception of sirens, strobes, and
the Alert Indicator.
When an audible panic alarm is activated, regardless of the
arming state, the external siren, internal siren, and strobe will
activate.
When an audible panic alarm is activated, the Alert Indicator
Event Flag in the associated area will activate.
If a silent PA zone, and an audible PA zone, are configured in
the same area each zone type functions individually according
to its programmed type.
However, if a silent PA zone is active, and an audible PA
zone is active at the same time, the silent PA alarm overrides
the audible behaviour, regardless of the order in which the
alarms occur. For example, if the audible PA zone activates
first, the internal/external sirens and strobe will activate. If a
silent PA alarm is then activated, all sirens and strobe are
turned off.

Zone name

1: Office 4 Door 2 Contact

TextWord 1:

Once the correct zone number is selected, the zone needs to be given a name.
The name identifies the zone to the end-user in case an alarm has occurred or
on arming the zone is still activated. Without a proper name, the end-user would
not be able to check for any problems that might arise in a particular zone.
A zone name can consist of 4 words from the library (called text words), each
separated by a 3 digit number between 1 and 255 (called a text variable). If a
number is not necessary, program the number as 0. This way the number will not
be used and the text words are combined using a space. Text variables can only
be used in combination with a text word. The complete name can have a
maximum length of 36 characters.
Zone names are taken from the library. The library contains a maximum of 900
words. Each word is identified as a number. This number has to be entered on
programming the zone name (see Table 9 on page 105). If a word does not exist,
it can be added in the programmable library, using menu 10-Program text (see
page 103). The programmable library can contain 100 words that have to be
programmed before they can be used.
Examples:
• Office 4 Door 1 Contact
• Office 4 Door 2 Contact
• Building 6 Area 4 Room 1 Door 6
• Building 6 Area 4 Door Right

Advisor Master Programming Guide 17

How to program zone names:
• Menu: Move to the next word or variable.
• ?, Enter: Enter the new information and press the Enter key.
• 0, Enter: Delete the word or variable. All words or variables are deleted from
this point onwards.
• Enter: Press the Enter key again to save the displayed information and move
to the next menu option display.

Using your own text words

If the library does not contain the correct text words, they can be programmed in
the menu 10-Program text (page 103). They have to be programmed before they
can be used.

Reporting of zone

1: 17-130, Burglar Alarm

Report:

Select the alarm to be reported if the zone generates an alarm. The event is
selected from the class database and the subclasses. The actual message that is
transmitted depends on the chosen protocol and the selected class and sub-
class. The class holds the basic reporting range (medical, fire, panic). The sub-
class is used to provide differentiation in the event being reported. E.g. The panic
class holds Contact ID codes 120 to 122 or SIA events PA and HA. See Table 14
on page 182.
See “9-Communication options” (page 94), “42-Reporting class database”
(page 164), and “Reporting” on page 182.

Report alarm to CS 1

YES-Report To CS1
*-Change 0-Skip

Use this option to select whether an alarm should be reported to Central

Station 1.

Report alarm to CS 2
See “Report alarm to CS 1”.

Report alarm to CS 3
See “Report alarm to CS 1”.

Report alarm to CS 4
See “Report alarm to CS 1”.

18 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Enable audio listen in

NO – Enable Audio Listen In

*-Change 0-Skip

When Yes is selected, this zone allows for audio listen in on alarm.
Yes: Audio Listen in enabled for this zone.
No: No Audio Listen in.

Engineer Reset on Alarm

NO – Engineer Reset on Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Select Yes to enable engineer reset for alarm in this zone. The user can not arm
the area the zone belongs to, until an engineer reset has been performed.
Yes: Engineer reset enabled for alarms in this zone.
No: No engineer reset.

How to perform an engineer reset

Whenever an engineer reset is required, the panel will display a 4-digit code.
This code is a reference to a special code that can be found in the Titan software
package (menu control) or contact your local distributor.

Engineer reset for tampers

NO – Engineer Reset on Tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

Select Yes to enable engineer reset for alarm in this zone. The user can not arm
the area the zone belongs to, until an engineer reset has been performed.
Yes: Engineer reset enabled for tamper alarms in this zone.
No: No engineer reset.

How to perform an engineer reset

Whenever an engineer reset is required, the panel will display a 4-digit code.
This code is a reference to a special code that can be found in the Titan software
package (menu control) or contact your local distributor.

Disable inhibit

NO – Disable Inhibit
*-Change 0-Skip

If users are allowed to inhibit the zone, select No.

Yes: No inhibit allowed.
No: This zone can be inhibited.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 19

Enable soak test

NO – Enable Soak Test

*-Change 0-Skip

This new option enables the input into soak test mode. The soak period is started
when a zone input is set to ‘soak test’. The period of the soak test is set via menu
Soak test days on page 83 from 0 to 255 days. If the Soak Test days value is set
to 0 then the soak test period is infinite and must be disabled by the user. If an
input is in soak test mode, it does not:
• report to central station
• activate siren
• activate strobe
• activate any outputs
But the change of state is logged in the history file with the new events “soak
alarm” and “soak alarm restore”. If the zone input does not alarm during the soak
test period, the Enable Soak Test option in that zone input’s database will be
reset when the soak test period has elapsed. The soak period is extended by the
Soak Test days period again if the zone input alarms during the soak test period.
The default is set to No.

Area / alarm group assignment

For zones to perform correct actions when active, an area or an alarm group has
to be linked to the zone. Whether an area or alarm group has to be programmed
depends on the zone type (types 6, 31, 34, and 35 require an alarm group).

Area
The zone needs an area to be able to send alarm information to an area and a
central station and to be able to reset when an alarm occurs. Assign the area to
the zone that has to alarm when the zone is activated and the area status (armed
or disarmed) meets the requirement for the zone type.
The function of the zone depends on the zone type selected during
programming.

Common area
Common areas have zones that should only go into alarm when all areas are
armed. E.g. the frontdoor in a building provides an entry to 2 areas, thus the
frontdoor needs to be a common area.
There are two ways to create zones in a common area. The first way is to assign
more then one area to a zone. That way the zone can only go into alarm if all
areas meet the ondition (armed or disarmed). The zone is disarmed if one area is
disarmed. In this option, the longest entry and exit time is used.
The other way to create a common area is to use area linking (see “19-Area
linking”, page 130). Here the common area is an additional area that
automatically arms as soon as the linked areas are armed. The common area
can be disarmed separately and has its own entry and exit times.

20 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Note: At least one area must be assigned to a zone. It is impossible to reset an
alarm on a zone that has no areas assigned.

Alarm group
Alarm groups are assigned to zones that perform alarm control. It is only
available for zone types 6, 31, 34, and 35.
The function of the alarm group depends on the zone type selected during
programming. These zone types are used for key switches etc. to arm/disarm
areas (i.e. causes the zone to act like a user entering an alarm control code).
Note: Before Alarm Groups can be assigned, they have to be programmed in “5-
Alarm groups” (page 50).

Test option

1: 2, Tested in Arm test & Disarmed

Test Type:

Use this record to select the automatic testing procedures of each zone. The
zone testing is done via the Disarm test and the Arm test. However, you can still
manually test zones.
There are five test procedure options, each identified by a reference number.
This reference number is used to program a testing procedure. See Table 4
below for a description of each test type.
Notes
• This record is invalid unless the test mode is correctly programmed in the “7-
System options” (see page 70).
• During the arm test, the testing event flag (event flag 16) will be activated
during half the “Testing event flag” time (see “6-Timers”, page 62). Use this
event flag to activate devices to generate alarms, for example when using
vault sensors. The other half is used for the device to switch back to normal
state.

Table 4: List of test type options

Reference Test type name Description
number
0. No Testing Program a zone with test type zero to exclude it from both the
Required disarm test and the arm test. It also does not appear in any
test report. The zone is not disabled during the disarm test.
Example: A duress button that is active during test mode,
siren cover, and panel tamper.
1. Test During Program a zone with test type 1 to include it in the disarm
Disarm Test test. The zone is disabled during any disarm test on areas
assigned to it.
Example: Hold-up button

Advisor Master Programming Guide 21

Reference Test type name Description
number
2. Tested In Arm Program a zone with test type 2 to include it in the arm test. If
Test & Disarmed the zone is activated during disarmed mode, it is considered
tested and is not be re-tested when the arm test is carried out.
Example: PIR’s, doors.
3. Test During Arm Program a zone with test type 3 to include in the arm test.
Test
Example: Any device that needs to be automatically tested.
4. Set E/Flag 13 Program a zone with test type 4 to event flag 13 during the
During Disarm disarm test.
Test:
This test type is used for testing devices activated by
disarmed alarm zone types (e.g.: Hold-up buttons). The
device must already be programmed to be activated by
disarmed alarm event flag 13.
5. Set Pre-Alarm Program a zone with test type 5 to activate the pre-alarm
During Disarm event flag during the disarm test in the area(s) assigned to the
Test zone.
This test type is used to test devices that are activated during
the delayed hold-up time (e.g.: a discreetly placed LED that
indicates to the user that the hold-up button is active).
The pre-alarm event flag number is programmed in “2-Area
database” on page 29.
6. Frequently used Program a zone with test type 6 during a Remote Diagnostic
detector session to determine which zone has not been triggered
during the last 6 hours after the last arming.

Zone event flag

No Zone Event Flag

Event Flag:

You can program event flags that are activated by a zone. Up to 15 event flags
can be assigned to an individual zone.
An event flag is activated when the zone is in alarm (except for the zone event
flag). The circumstances that cause a zone to generate an alarm depend on the
zone type. The event flags activated by an alarm depend on:
• Which event flags have been assigned to the zone.
• Whether the active time of the event flags corresponds with the alarm time.
Event flags can be active:
- 24 hours
- When disarmed only (when one or more of the areas assigned to the zone is
disarmed)
- When armed only (when all the areas assigned to the zone are armed)
• Whether the option “Make all events 24 hour” on page 24 has been set to
Yes. If so, the active period is 24 hours for all event flags.

22 Advisor Master Programming Guide

• Zone types 0, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 31, 34, 35, 36,
37, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 51,52, 53, 54, and 55 do not activate any of the event
flags.
• Zone types 7, 16, 18, 27, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, and 55 only activate the
zone event type.
For further information on event flags, see “Event Flags” on page 179.

How to program event flags:

The zone event flag is programmed with a value between 17 and 255.
Note: Event flag numbers 1 to 16 are pre-defined. Do not use these event flags
elsewhere in the system, even if they are not used for zones. See also “Event
Flags” on page 179.

Internal siren event flag

YES – Internal Siren, Program in DB

*-Change 0-Skip

Select if the internal siren event flag should be activated. The Internal siren event
flag is assigned in the Area database.
Yes: The Internal siren event flag specified in the area database is activated
when the zone generates an alarm, and all the areas assigned to the zone are
armed.
No: The Internal siren event flag will not be triggered by an alarm in this zone.
Note: For the Internal siren event flag to operate, you must also program the
Internal siren event flag number in the area database for each of the areas that
activate internal sirens and that are assigned to the zone. Refer to “2-Area
database” on page 29. See also “Zone event flag” on page 22.

External siren event flag

YES – External Siren, Program in DB

*-Change 0-Skip

Select if the external siren event flag should be activated. The External siren
event flag is assigned in the Area database.
Yes: The External siren event flag specified in the area database is activated
when the zone generates an alarm, and all the areas assigned to the zone are
armed.
No: The External siren event flag will not be triggered by an alarm in this zone.
Note: For the External siren event flag to operate, you must also program the
External siren event flag number in the area database for each of the areas that
activate internal sirens and that are assigned to the zone. Refer to “2-Area
database” on page 29.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 23

Keypad buzzer

NO – Keypad Buzzer
*-Change 0-Skip

The keypad buzzer can be activated during an alarm.

Yes: When the zone generates an alarm, the keypad buzzer is activated on the
keypads that control the areas assigned to the zone.
No: An alarm on the zone will not trigger the buzzer.
See also “Zone event flag” on page 22.

Make all events 24 hour

NO – Make All Events 24 Hour

*-Change 0-Skip

Used to activate all event flags on alarm.

Yes: All armed and disarmed alarm event flags are triggered when the zone
generates an alarm, regardless if the status of the area.
No: The armed and disarmed alarm flags are triggered depending on the status
of the area(s) assigned to the zone
See also “Zone event flag” on page 22.

Trigger EF 2, armed alarm

YES – Event Flag 2, Armed Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Event flag 2 is triggered when the zone generates an alarm and the area is
armed.
No: Event flag 2 will not be triggered.
See also “Zone event flag” (page 22).

Trigger EF 3, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” above.

Trigger EF 4, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” above.

Trigger EF 5, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” above.

24 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Trigger EF 6, disarmed alarm

NO-Event Flag 6, Disarmed Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Event flag 6 is triggered if the zone generates an alarm and any area
assigned to the zone is disarmed.
No: Event flag 6 is not triggered.
See also “Zone event flag” (page 22).

Trigger EF 7, disarmed alarm

See “Trigger EF 6, disarmed alarm” above.

Trigger EF 8, 24 hr alarm

NO-Event Flag 8, 24Hr Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Event flag 8 is triggered if the zone generates an alarm, regardless of the
status of the area(s) assigned to the zone.
No: Event flag will not be triggered.
See also “Zone event flag” (page 22).

Trigger EF 9, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” on page 24.

Trigger EF 10, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” on page 24.

Trigger EF 11, armed alarm

See “Trigger EF 2, armed alarm” on page 24.

Trigger zone EF if active

NO – Trigger Zone Event Flag if Active

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: The zone event flag is triggered when the zone is active, regardless of the
status of the area(s) assigned to the zone.
No: The zone event flag is only triggered when the zone generates an alarm.
See also “Zone event flag” (page 22).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 25

Trigger chime/camera EF in area DB

No–Chime/Camera Event, Program in Area DB

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: The chime/camera event flag programmed in the area database is activated
whenever the zone generates an alarm and the area is disarmed.
No: Chime/camera event flag will not be triggered.
Note: If the chime/camera event flag is to operate, you must also program the
chime/camera event flag number in the area database for each of the areas that
have cameras and that are assigned to the zone. Refer to “Chime/camera event
flag” on page 32.
To activate the camera event flag when the area is armed, set “Make all events
24 hour” on page 24 to Yes.
If enabled in System Options > “Enable chime” on page 87, the event flag will
become and react as a Zone Chime event flag. During the areas disarmed period
the chime event flag is set each time a zone, enabled for chime, changes from
normal (4K7) to active (9K4). The flag will remain set for the time (1 to 255
seconds) programmed in Timers > “Chime time is set to” on page 68.
The chime function works with the following zone types:

Type Description
2 Armed Alarm
13 Entry Exit no arm check
14 Access no arm check
28 Armed alarm with auto-reset
60 Exit terminator
66 Final door set
68 Anti-mask detector

Notes
• To activate the camera event flag when the area is armed, set Make all
events 24 hour to YES.
• When set to YES, the Siren Event flag will be ignored to have silent alarms
(Panic or Hold-up alarm).
See also “Zone event flag” (page 22).

Print zone when active

NO – Print Zone When Active

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Activation of the zone has to be printed or sent to a computer.

No: Activation does not have to be printed or sent to a computer.

26 Advisor Master Programming Guide

How to program
See “How to program” on page 5 for information on which keys to use.

Engineer walk test

YES – Engineer Walk Test

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Zone will be configured to be included in the engineer walk test.

No: Zone will not be configured to be included in the engineer walk test.
Note: Default will be Yes.

Double Knock

NO – Double Knock
*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: This zone will be configured for double knock activation in a certain time
interval
No: Zone will not be configured for double knock functionality
If set to Yes and a zone becomes active, at the point where the alarm condition
will normally be activated, two zone timers shall be triggered. An interval timer is
preset with the value contained in “Double knock interval (min)” on page 67, and
begins counting downwards. A second timer (duration) is preset with the value
contained in “Double knock duration (sec)” on page 67, and also counts
downwards.
Notes
• Only the following zone types are applicable:
- 1: disarmed alarm
- 2: armed alarm
- 4: access alarm
- 14: access alarm (no arm check)
• Default is No.

User walk test

YES – User Walk Test

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Zone will be configured to be included in the user walk test.

No: Zone will not be configured to be included in the user walk test.
Note: Default will be Yes.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 27

Anti-mask detector

YES – AntiMask Detector

*-Change 0-Skip

When this option is set to Yes, the lower alarm window, nominally 2,35 kΩ, is
monitored for a detector masked condition.

Part set zone

Note: this option is not available in firmware versions earlier than 04.10.00
When a zone is programmed for Part set (Yes), it is excluded when the assigned
area is Part set armed.
The normal disarmed conditions, if relevant, will continue to be monitored -
tamper, anti-mask etc.
Notes
• If a zone is assigned multiple areas it is not armed until all assigned areas are
armed. If there is a mixture of Part Set and Full Set areas assigned to the
zone, the zone will obey the Part Set condition.
• The Part Set exclusion is only available for the zone types listed below. All
other zone types will ignore this function.
The Part Set function works with the following zone types:
• 2: armed alarm
• 3: entry exit with arm check
• 4: access
• 13: entry/exit (no arm check)
• 14: access (no arm check)
• 28: armed alarm with auto-reset
• 66: final door set

28 Advisor Master Programming Guide

2-Area database
Each area can be programmed with a number of options, like the area name,
entry- and exit times, event flags etc. Before going any further, select the area to
program.

Select the area to program

Area Database
Area No:

Enter the area number to program.

Area settings
Area name

Area Name: 0260, Workshop

Text No:

Every area can be programmed with a name to identify the area.

The words are selected from a list already held by the ATS system. They can be
either from the list of standard words available (see Table 9 on page 105), or
from a list of words that you have programmed yourself (see “10-Program text”
on page 103).
The display shows the current area name, preceded by its reference number.

How to program a name

Names are programmed using the reference number that identifies a word. Once
the reference number is entered, the name is visible behind the number.

Exit time

Area 1 : > Exit Time 60 Entry Time 30

Exit time:

Every area has its own exit timers. Exit timers allow users that arm an area, to
leave the premises without generating an alarm (using access or entry/exit
zones). Only after the exit timers have expired, an alarm can occur.
Each area can be programmed with one exit time. The exit times apply to zone
types 3, 4, 13, 14, 41, and 42 (all entry/exit or access). The entry time however
can only be started with zone types 3, 13, 41, and 42 (entry/exit).
Behind the area number, a number and an ‘I’ or ‘O’ can show up, in case an
entry (I) or exit (O) time is running. The number indicates the seconds left to
leave the area.
The exit timers can be programmed from 0 to 255 seconds.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 29

Note: If zones are assigned to more then one area, the longest exit time is used.
See “1-Zone database” on page 7.

Entry time

Area 1 : > Exit Time 60 Entry Time 30

Entry time:

Every area has its own entry timers. When entering the premises via a entry/exit
zone, the entry time starts. A user can disarm the area while the entry time is
running without generating an alarm.
Each area can be programmed with one entry time. The entry times apply to
zone types 3, 4, 13, 14, 41, and 42 (all entry/exit or access). The entry time
however can only be started with zone types 3, 13, 41, and 42 (entry/exit).
Behind the area number, a number and an ‘I’ or ‘O’ can show up, in case an
entry (I) or exit (O) time is running. The number indicates the seconds left to
leave the area.
The entry timers can be programmed from 0 to 255 seconds.
Note: If zones are assigned to more then one area, the longest entry and exit
time is used. See “1-Zone database” on page 7.

External siren event flag

Area 1 External Siren No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Areas are capable of triggering event flags. Different from event flags in the zone
database, these event flags are triggered by an area event, not from a particular
zone event.
The External siren event flag is triggered if any zone with the External Siren
Event flag set to Yes generates an alarm. Each area can have its own external
siren, using different event flags for each area. See “Event Flags” on page 179.

Internal siren event flag

Area 1 Internal Siren No Event Flag

Event Flag:

The Internal siren event flag is triggered if any zone with the Internal Siren Event
flag set to Yes generates an alarm. Each area can have its own internal siren,
using different event flags for each area. See “Event Flags” on page 179.
Note: The default value for this option is 13.

Area disarmed event flag

Area 1 Disarmed No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Active when the area is disarmed.

30 Advisor Master Programming Guide

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Area active event flag

Area 1 Active No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Used to indicate if any zone in the area is active, excluding zones that can be
used to change the status of an area, that are used for camera’s or that are of
zone type Unused.
See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Inhibited event flag

Area 1 Inhibited No Event Flag

Event Flag:

A zone in this area has been inhibited.

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Armed Alarm event flag

Area 1 Armed Alarm No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates on an alarm when the area is armed.

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Disarmed alarm event flag

Area 1 Disarmed Alarm No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates on an alarm when the area is disarmed.

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Local alarm event flag

Area 1 Local Alarm No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates on local alarms from firedoor and 24 hr local fail zone types in the area.
See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.
Activates on zone types 15, 16, 18, 21, 30, 41, 42, 44 and 56. See “1-Zone
database”, Table 3 (page 8) for more information.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 31

Exit timer event flag

Area 1 Exit Timer No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates when the exit time for the area is running.

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Entry timer event flag

Area 1 Entry Timer No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates when an entry time for the area is running.

See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Warning timer event flag

Area 1 Warning Time No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates to indicate that:

• An alarm group restriction timer is running and the area is about to be armed.
• A testmode is in progress and the test is about to end.
See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

Chime/camera event flag

Area 1 Chime/Camera No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Activates when a zone with the chime/camera event flag set to Yes generates an
alarm and the area is disarmed. Used to control chime or cameras. The camera
event flag can be reset by pressing Enter, Enter, 0, Enter.
Note: To activate the chime/camera event flag when the area is disarmed, see
“Make all events 24 hour” (page 24) and Trigger chime/camera (page 26).
See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.
For more information on the chime functionality, see “Enable chime” in System
Options on page 87.

Pre-alarm timer event flag

Area 1 Pre-Alarm Timer No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Indicates that a delayed disarmed alarm zone is active and the delay time is
running. Used to provide visual indication of a possible alarm.
See also “External siren event flag” on page 30.

32 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Anti-mask reset event flag

Area 1 Anti-Mask Reset No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag forces the user to test the detectors before the area can be
armed. If an attempt to arm an area that has the anti-mask event flag set to a
non-zero value and any inputs associated with this area are active, the event flag
is set for 30 minutes. The anti-mask reset event flag is active for the duration of
the timer and is reset when either the timer time elapses or the area is
successfully armed.
It is used with PIR detectors with an anti-mask feature. An output is assigned to
the anti-mask reset event flag which is wired to the detectors. When this output is
activated, the detectors must be triggered by a walk test in order for them to
become normal after the output is de-activated (after 30 minutes).
Note: There are no anti-mask reset event flags set in the area default settings.

Latched reset event flag

Area 1 Latched Reset No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is triggered when two valid disarm codes are entered for an area
within 5 minutes and the area is disarmed. The event flag is set for five seconds.
For a further 4 seconds, the zone input type 67 (Latched Detector) associated
with that area are disabled (The zones are disabled for a total of 9 seconds). The
zone input type 67 is a 24 hour alarm, conditional inhibit, conditional on the
abovementioned 9 second (total) timer. It is used to reset latching fire detectors.

Alarm-A event flag

Area 1 Alarm-A No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Used to generate an event linkable to a relay output to primarily support the Red
Care communications unit in the UK. This event flag follows the ‘A’ event
generated by the AB alarms as sent to the central station event out queue.

Alarm-B event flag

Area 1 Alarm-B No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Used to generate an event linkable to a relay output to primarily support the Red
Care communications unit in the UK. This event flag follows the ‘A’ event
generated by the AB alarms as sent to the central station event out queue.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 33

Out-of-hours timezone

Out Of Hour Timezone: 0

Enter Tz:

Used to generate a report if the area is disarmed while the area should be
armed. The message is reported depending on the type of transmission protocol.

Area disarmed time

Area Disarmed Time: 0 Mins

Enter Mins:

When using alarm group restrictions, one of the options available is to disarm an
area for a disarmed period. If the Area Disarmed time is not ‘0’, then this time will
be used. See 15-Alarm group restrictions on page 118.
Note: If the Disarmed time for the Alarm group Restriction is set to 0, to specify
that the area will not re-arm, the "Area Disarmed Time" does apply for that area
(see 6-Timers on page 62 for more information).

Report to Central Station 1

YES – Report To CS1

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Report opening/closing and Late to Close to Central Station 1.

No: Do not report to Central Station 1.

Report to Central Station 2

See “Report to Central Station 1”.

Report to Central Station 3

See “Report to Central Station 1”.

Report to Central Station 4

See “Report to Central Station 1”.

Enable audio listen in

NO – Enable Audio Listen In

*-Change 0-Skip

When audio listen in has to be enabled for this area on opening, closing or if
accessed after hours, use this option.
Yes: Audio Listen in enabled for this area.
No: Adio Listen in disabled.

34 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Enable exit fault reporting

NO – Enable Exit Faults

*-Change 0-Skip

Exit faults occur when an access zone or exit zone is still open at the moment the
exit time expires. On an exit fault a local alarm is generated and a special Exit
Fault is reported to the central station.
Yes: Enable exit fault reporting.
No: No exit fault reporting.

A&B alarm reporting (ACPO)

NO – A&B Alarm Reporting (ACPO)

*-Change 0-Skip

Special facility for ACPO to be able to transmit verfied alarms.

When the first zone activates, an alarm will be transmitted to the central station. If
a second zone activates within the A to B time, a verified alarm will be
transmitted. Otherwise a normal alarm will be transmitted.
Yes: Use verified A&B reporting.
No: No A&B alarm reporting.
See “A to B alarm delay (ACPO)” (page 66).

Disable arming if all inhibited

NO – Disable Arming If All Inhibited

*-Change 0-Skip

When arming an area should not be possible if all zones within the area are
inhibited, set this menu to Yes.
Yes: No arming available if all zones in the area are inhibited.
No: Arming is available when all zones in the area are inhibited.

KeyBox time (min)

KeyBox Time: 5 Mins

Enter Mins:

Extends the exit time. Immediately after the exit timer expires, the KeyBox timer
starts for a duration of N minutes. Close the zone before this additional KeyBox
timer expires. If it is not closed, a full alarm will be triggered again even if the
previous trigger was also an alarm. During exit timer + KeyBox timer, openings
and closings will not be registered and will not cause an alarm.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 35

Area tamper alarm event flag

Tamper Alarm No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag becomes active whenever a tamper alarm is detected on an input
associated with the specific area, and is independent of arming state.

Arm complete event flag

Arm Complete No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Arm complete event flag indicates completion of arming.

Disarm complete event flag

Disarm Complete No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Disarm complete event flag indicates completion of disarming.

Alert indicator event flag

Alert Indicator No Event Flag

Event Flag:

When an event occurs requiring text to be displayed on the user interface during
the disarmed state, the alert indicator activates.

Panic alarm event flag

Panic Alarm No Event Flag 70

Event Flag:

An event flag corresponding to the state of the PA Area Alarm Timer running
state (one per area).

Anti-mask/fault event flag

Anti-Mask/Fault No Event Flag 70

Event Flag:

Activates when a detector is masked or on a detector fault.

Part set exit time

NO-Part Set Exit Time

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, Part Set arming uses the programmed exit time. If an exit terminator
(zone type 60) is programmed for the area and the Full Set exit time is zero, the
exit time is 20 seconds.

36 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Part set entry time

YES-Part Set Entry Time

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Normal entry procedure when Part Set armed.

No: No entry time for Part Set arming.
Notes
• If set to No, Part Set armed, and an entry exit zone is activated, an instant
alarm condition will occur.
• If an entry exit zone (types 3 or 13) has multiple areas assign to the zone, and
one or more of the areas are Part Set armed, setting this menu to No for any
one area will exclude the entry time for the assigned areas.

Part set exit buzzer

NO-Part Set Exit Buzzer

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Buzzer will sound for the Part Set arming exit time.
No: Buzzer will not sound for the Part Set arming exit time.
Note: If the set to NO, although there is no exit buzzer, the exit time is still
retained.

Part set external siren

NO-Part Set External Siren

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: A Part Set alarm will activate the External siren.

No: A Part Set alarm will not activate the External siren
Note: if the zone causing the alarm is assigned to a multiple areas and any of
these areas has the Part Set External Siren enabled, the external siren will
sound.

Part set access to E/E

YES-Part Set Access to E/E

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the operation of any access zone in the Part Set area is change to
operate as an entry exit zone. The purpose of this is to allow access to the
disarming keypad when it is in the view of an access detection zone (PIR).
Example: A residential property with an external entry exit door leading to a hall
in which the arming/disarming keypad is fitted, and is in the view of an access
PIR detector. For Full Set disarming the normal entry will be; to activate the entry
(exit) zone first starting the entry time and inhibiting the access zone; so when
accessing the hall area to disarm, the access zone does not activate the alarm.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 37

This operation is not normally possible when the user stays in the premises and
is Part Set disarming the area, as the user will access the keypad directly without
activating the entry time. This will activate the access detector without starting
the entry time and will cause an alarm condition. To avoid this situation when
Part Set armed, this menu allows all access zones in the area to change there
operation to entry exit allowing the user to access the keypad to disarm a Part
Set arming, and only starting the entry time when coming into view of the access
zone.
Yes: An access zone (type 4 or 14) operation is change to an entry/exit zone (3
or 13) operation when Part Set armed.
No: Normal operation for the entry exit zone type programmed.

Enable part set reporting

NO-Enable Part Set Reporting

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Normal programmed reporting.

No: Intruder armed alarm reporting is disabled. The A alarm event flag, B alarm
event flag and the Disarm flag are also disabled. 24 hour zone types, system
alarms and tamper alarms will still report.

Disable part set B-alarms

NO-Disable Part Set B-Alarms

*-Change 0-Skip

Note: This menu is only applicable if Part Set reporting is set to Yes.
Yes: Alarm confirmation (BV) reporting is disabled when Part Set armed. First
alarm report type (BA) is reported for all intruder alarms The B confirmed alarm
event flag and the ‘Engineer reset on B alarm’ are also disabled.
No: Normal Alarm confirmed reporting for Part Set.

Chime on RAS

Chime on RAS: 0
0=NO RAS

Select a RAS address number to sound its buzzer when an area’s chime event
occurs.
• 0: no RAS selected, RAS buzzers will not be activated.
• 1 to 16: RAS 1 to 16. The selected RAS address will activate its buzzer for
the duration of the chime event.
Only one RAS address may be selected in this menu. If all RAS buzzers are to
activate, allocate the Chime event flag number to System Flags Keypad buzzers.
For more information see System Options > “Enable chime” on page 87.

38 Advisor Master Programming Guide

3-RAS database
Arming stations are devices used to provide system control, such as arming or
disarming of areas. Depending on the type of arming station, additional functions
can be available, such as LCD displays, menus to set time and date etc. The
term RAS is an abbreviation for Remote Arming Station.

RAS to be polled
1, 2, 3: 4
Poll RAS:

Each arming station has to be polled, in order to be used. Add RAS’s for polling
by entering the dipswitch address it has been given. RAS’s that do not have to be
polled can be deleted by entering the dipswitch address again.
Display shows the RAS’s currently recorded. A RAS number followed by a “,” is
online and followed by a “:” is offline (can not be addressed by the system).
Note: A RAS or DGP being online means it will generate RAS/DGP system
alarms and tamper alarms. When offline, system alarms and tampers will not
occur.

Select RAS to program

Arming Station Details
RAS No:

Once the RAS’s have been selected for polling and Enter has been pressed, the
RAS’s can be programmed.

RAS settings
Area alarm group

RAS: 2 Alm-Grp: 2-Master RAS or Door

Alm-Grp:

You need to define an alarm group to state which areas can be controlled from
this RAS.
Note: Only options which are both in the RAS’s alarm group and the users alarm
group can be performed on any RAS.
See menu 5-Alarm groups on page 50 for further information on how alarm
groups operate.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 39

Menu alarm group

RAS: 2 Alm-Grp: 2-Master RAS or Door

Menu Alm-Grp:

The menu alarm group determines which actions are allowed on a RAS. If no
alarm control is allowed, this can be achieved in the menu alarm group. The
menu alarm group can also have more areas than the area alarm group. The
user can have no alarm control over those areas, but can for example see the
status of zones in these areas.
If the menu alarm group is programmed for alarm group1 - No Access, then the
arming station will use the area alarm group as menu alarm group.

Door event flag

RAS: 2 Has No Door Event Flag

Event Flag:

If a door has to be unlocked using the RAS, enter the event flag here. The event
flag can be assigned to an output and will be activated when a valid code is
entered at the arming station.
What is recognised as a valid code for unlocking the door depends on the setting
in “Enter key opens door only” on page 42, and “Alarm code prefix” on page 72.

Chime event flag

RAS: 2 Has No Chime Event Flag

Event Flag:

When the event flag in the above option is active, the effective RAS chime is
activated for duration specified in “Chime time is set to” (programmable from
timer database on page 68). The event flag can be activated by a zone, area,
macro, etc.
Note: The chime must be enabled. See “Enable chime” on page 47.

Output controller assigned

RAS: 3 Can See Output Controller 1

Output Ctrl:

Keypads with card reader interfaces have an output OUT. To be able to control
the output, an output control group has to be assigned to the RAS. The first
output on the output controller is also the OUT output from the RAS. Whenever
the first output is activated, the OUT output is also activated.
The output control group entered here does not need to be physically available.
Note: If two RAS’s have the same output control group and the user has both
doors in his doorgroup, both relays will be switched simultaneously.

40 Advisor Master Programming Guide

LCD arming station

YES – LCD Arming Station

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: This arming station is a LCD arming station. This has to be set in order to
be able to operate LCD arming stations.
No: This is not a LCD arming station.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

Table 5: Programming the arming stations

Programmable function Arming stations
ATS1100 ATS1105 ATS1150/1155 ATS1170
LCD arming station Y Y N N
Toggle Area status N N O [1] O
Enter key opens door only O O O N
Door event flag on alarm codes O O O N
Display shunted zone on LCD O O N N
Arm/disarm using one key O [2] O [2] N N
Cards auto disarm N O N O
Card always arms/disarms N O N O
Reset from RAS without code O O O N
AG restriction disarm only O O O O

Legend:
Y Must be set to Yes
N Must be set to No
O Optional
[1] The "Toggles area status" option is NOT recommended
[2] CAUTION! If a LCD arming station is used as master; and "Arm Using One Key" is set to
Yes; the system must be programmed so that areas 9 to 16 can never be armed

Toggle Area status

NO – Code ENTER Toggles Area Status

*-Change 0-Skip

Toggle area status provides users with an option to have arm control on keypads
combined with readers.
Yes: The On and Off keys have lost their function. For arm control one needs to
enter the user code followed by On, Off or Enter. If a list of areas appears,
pressing the area number and Enter toggles the status of the area. If no list is
available, the status of the area(s) is toggled immediately.
No: Normal alarm control.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 41

Notes
• Do not use this option if “Enter key opens door only” below is set to Yes.
• Using this option is not recommended.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.
See Table 6 below for information on using card readers for alarm control.

Table 6: Using card readers for alarm control

Function Programming options
Toggle area Card auto Card always Notes
Card, OFF disarms No No No ATS1155,
Card, ON arms ATS1105 ONLY
Card disarms Yes No Yes
Card arms

Enter key opens door only

YES – ENTER Key Opens Door Only

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: When using LCD arming stations, using the On and Off key for alarm
control results in a clearer user interface. It also provides an option to use the
Enter key for opening a door with a keypad.
No: The Enter key unlocks the door, but also provides alarm control and resets
alarms.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.
Note: Set this option to Yes for the best user interface on LCD arming stations.

Door event flag on alarm codes

NO – Door Event Flag On Alarm Codes

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: If user codes with alarm control and door groups perform alarm control, the
door will unlock.
No: User codes with alarm control will not unlock doors.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.
Note: The user needs to have alarm control and a door group.

42 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Display shunted zone on LCD

NO – Display Shunting on LCD

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: When a zone is shunted, the text ‘Zone shunted,’ will appear on the display.
No: Nothing is shown when a zone is shunted.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

Arm/disarm using one key

NO – Arm/Disarm Using One Key

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Provides an option to arm or disarm areas by pressing the number of the
area without Enter, after having entered the user code.
No: Normal alarm control.
Note: This option is only available for areas 1-8.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

Cards auto disarm

NO – Cards Auto Disarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Allows cards to disarm areas without using the Off key.
No: Only the door is unlocked, except if “Card always arms/disarms” below is set
to Yes or the On/Off key is used.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

Card always arms/disarms

NO – Cards Always Arm/Disarm

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Allows cards to arm/disarm areas without using the On/Off keys. Also
“Toggle Area status” on page 41 has to be set to Yes.
No: Normal alarm control.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.
Note: The card user's alarm group and the arming station's (reader's) alarm
group must both allow arm and/or disarm functions before a card can be used to
arm/disarm.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 43

Reset from RAS without code

NO – Reset From RAS Without Code

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Allows users to reset alarms by pressing Enter, Enter (show alarms)
followed by 0, Enter. The areas in alarm have to be assigned to the arming
stations alarm group.
No: Reset only with user code.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

AG restriction disarm only

NO – AlmGrp Restriction Disarm Only

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Users with alarm group restrictions can only disarm or delay automatic
arming. It cannot be used for alarm group restrictions with arm and reset.
No: There is no restriction.
See Table 5 on page 41 for further information on options available to arming
stations.

Entry/exit buzzers

YES – Entry/Exit Buzzers

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Enable buzzer for entry/exit timers.

No: No entry/exit timers on buzzer.
Note: Entry time must be >10 seconds.

Timed lockout by wrong codes

NO – Timed Lockout
*-Change 0-Skip

When a wrong code has been entered 10 times, the RAS access is blocked for
90 seconds.
After a correct code with the proper authorisation in the alarm group (Alarm
system control) has been entered, the code tamper event flag will reset.
Yes: On a code tamper, the RAS locks out for time defined in “RAS lockout time”
on page 68.
No: Only event is reported. The RAS is available.

44 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Cards arm after 3 badges

NO – Cards Arm After 3 Badges

*-Change 0-Skip

This is an added option to arm an assigned area. When set to Yes, 3 badges of a
valid card will arm the assigned area(s).
Notes
• The 3 badges must occur within 10 seconds. If not, they will not be
recognised for arming.
• The default is set to No.

Disable status LED's

YES-Disable Status LED's

*-Change 0-Skip

This option disables the optical indicators on the BUS device card readers. The
option to enable or disable the status LED's will have to be set by the user
because not all non-LCD BUS devices are card readers therefore this option will
have to be set based on the hardware connected.
If this option is set to Yes, the panel, when polling / commanding the card reader
RAS, it will not set any of the LED bits in the packet. This will result in the LED's
not being active.
Note: Limitation: Certain card reader settings override the status of command
packet LED bits - i.e. LED's remain illuminated even though LED bits are
disabled. In order to use this feature, it may be necessary to alter card reader
configurations.
Altering card reader configurations:
• For the ATS1170 Smart Door Controller:
- Menu 5 - Led 1 Options: Led 1: Door Unlocked Only
• For the ATS1190 Smart Card Reader:
- Menu 1-Leds On-Line: 1-Blue Led: Door Open Only
- Menu 3-Valid Card Flash: Flash Disabled
- Menu 4-Night Light: Night Light Disabled

3 LED RAS

NO – 3 LED RAS
*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, it is possible to configure different actions if the RAS is an

ATS1151/56.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 45

Card & PIN (disarm only)

NO – CARD & PIN (Disarm Only)

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Both card and PIN are required to disarm the system.
No: The system will disarm with card or PIN
The panel is not currently able to discriminate if an ATS1190/92 or ATS1151/56
type RAS is in use by polling the device.
Notes
• The default is set to No.
• See also “RAS card & PIN timeout” on page 67.

RAS tamper (ACPO) area

RAS Tamper (ACPO) Area 1

Area:

Allocates the RAS to an area for alarm and tamper.

The default is set to Area 1.

Card & PIN (always)

NO – Card & PIN (Always)

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Both card and PIN are required to:

• Arm, disarm and reset the system
• Open a door
• Have access to any installer or user menu
No: The system (with card only) can:
• Arm, disarm and reset the system
• Open a door
The system (with PIN only) can:
• Arm, disarm and reset the system
• Open a door
• Have access to any installer or user menu
Note: If this option is set to Yes, then the option “Cards arm after 3 badges”
described on page 45 is not functional.

46 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Enter unlocks screensaver

NO – ENTER Unlocks Screensaver

*-Change 0-Skip

If the screensaver is active, PIN / Enter unlocks the screensaver, without

performing any further action. After the screensaver is unlocked, keypad
operation is normal, until the screensaver again becomes active.

RAS code tamper event flag

RAS Code Tamper No Event Flag

Event Flag:

When a wrong code has been entered 10 times the RAS access will be blocked
for 90 seconds. At the same moment the event flag “Code tamper” will be
triggered.
See also “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44.

Enable chime

YES-Enable Chime
*-Change 0-Skip

The RAS chime is triggered by any of the following input: Event flag, Zone
activation, Zone shunting, Keys sequence. The chime is only activated on the
RAS that has chime option enabled.
For more information, see System Options > “Enable chime” on page 87.

Timed lockout by wrong badges

NO-Timed Lockout By Wrong Badges

*-Change 0-Skip:

If the Timed Lockout by Wrong Badges option is set to Yes, 10 wrong badges will
cause a RAS lockout as well as wrong codes.
See also “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 47

4-DGP database
This menu enables or disables DGP’s (Data Gathering Panels). Also the type of
DGP can be programmed.

DGPs to be polled
1, 2, 3: 4
Poll DGP:

Each DGP has to be polled, in order to be able to exchange data with the ATS
control panel. Add DGP’s for polling by entering the dipswitch address it has
been given. DGP’s that do not have to be polled can be deleted by entering the
dipswitch address again.
The display shows the DGP’s currently recorded. A DGP number followed by a
“,” is online (available) and followed by a “:” is offline (can not be addressed by
the system).
Note: A RAS or DGP being online means it will generate RAS/DGP system
alarms and tamper alarms. When offline, system alarms and tampers will not
occur.
Once the DGP’s to be polled have been programmed and Enter has been
pressed, the DGP to be programmed has to be entered before going further.
Note: The four-door/four-lift DGP’s (ATS1250/ATS1260) must not be addressed
higher than Address 12.
Removing a DGP from the polling list clears all alarms for zones and system
points for that DGP address. If the next DGP address number is not polled,
alarms on any of the 32 zones that belong to the DGP are cleared.
For further information on addresses and numbering, refer to “Zones and Outputs
allocated to DGP’s” (see Advisor Master Installation Guide).

48 Advisor Master Programming Guide

DGP settings
DGP type

Set DGP Type

DGP No:

Standard
Type:

The type of DGP being polled has to be programmed. The available DGP types
are:

No Type ATS type

0. Standard ATS1201, ATS1210, ATS1220
1. Four-door DGP ATS1250
2. Four-lift DGP ATS1260
3. Wireless DGP (433MHz) ATS1230
4. Point ID DGP ATS1290
5. Advanced DGP ATS1203, ATS1204
6. Bank DGP ATS1280
7. Advanced wireless DGP ATS1232, AL-1233, ATS1234, ATS1236

DGP Tamper (ACPO) Area

RAS Tamper (ACPO) Area 1

Area:

Allocates the DGP to an area for tamper.

The default is set to Area 1.

DGP battery test event flag

The event flag is set for the duration of a battery test cycle for both manually
initiated battery tests and scheduled tests. Only the DGPs that have this event
flag set will have their battery tested.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 49

5-Alarm groups
This program block is used to record information about alarm groups.

What is an alarm group?

An alarm group provides means to users, zones and arming stations to control
the ATS system regarding alarm functions (also called alarm control). Alarm
groups have areas, menu options, panel options and timezones.
Alarm groups are assigned to users, and to each piece of equipment on which
the user performs a function (arming stations, doors 17 to 64, and area control
zone types 6, 31, 34 and 35). This provides enormous flexibility when
determining a user’s access to, and control of, the system.

Caution: You must be extremely careful when changing alarm groups. Both the
functions performed by users in that alarm group, and the functions available at
remote arming stations and door readers with that alarm group, are affected.

Important points when programming an alarm group

A function that is provided to a user via their alarm group is only valid when:
• Program settings in other sections of the same alarm group allow it.
E.g.: Restricting alarm system control to Reset Only would be invalid unless
the alarm group has been allowed alarm system control in the first place. If
the record Restriction Reset Only is set to Yes, the record Alarm System
Control must be set to Yes.
• The user’s alarm group has the same program setting as the alarm group of
the RAS or door the user is using.
E.g.: If the record Prompt with List of Areas is set at Yes in the user’s alarm
group, it must also be set at Yes in the alarm group of the RAS or door. If it is
not, areas are not listed when arming/disarming.
• The user’s alarm group includes the areas assigned to the alarm group of the
RAS or door the user is using.
E.g.: If a user’s alarm group has areas 1,2 and 3 and the alarm group of the
RAS or door has areas 2 and 3, the functions for areas 2 and 3 only are valid.
• The timezones assigned to both the user's alarm group and to the alarm
group of the RAS or door both have to be valid.

Alarm group number

Alarm Group **WARNING**
Alm-Grp:

Every alarm group must be numbered. They are numbered from 1 to 138.

50 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Alarm groups 1 to 10 are hard coded into the system. They can be viewed but
can not be changed as they contain master control settings and default settings.

Table 7: Default settings for alarm groups

Number Name User menu options
1. No access All set to No
2. Master RAS or door All set to Yes
3. Master code access All set to Yes
4. 8 area master RAS (1-8) All set to Yes
5. 8 area master RAS (9-16) All set to Yes
6. Master user All set to Yes except 19
7. Manager All set to Yes except 19
8. Master Engineer All set to Yes except 8 to 11, 14, 16 to 18
9. Master Service All set to Yes except 8 to 11, 14, 16 to 18 and
timezone 25
10. Spare alarm group All set to No
11. High level master All set to Yes except 19
12. Low level master All set to Yes except 1, 5, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 16
13. All area user All set to Yes except 1, 5, 9, 10, 11
14 to 29 Area one to area sixteen All set to Yes except 1, 5, 9, 10, 11

Alarm groups 14 to 29 are for individual areas. The areas assigned to the alarm
groups are as follows:

Alarm group Area Alarm group Area Alarm group Area

14 1 19 6 24 11
15 2 20 7 25 12
16 3 21 8 26 13
17 4 22 9 27 14
18 5 23 10 28 15
29 16

Note: In a new system, alarm groups 11 to 29 are pre-programmed with some

standard settings. You can change them if necessary. Alarm groups 30 to 138
are programmable to suit individual system requirements.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 51

Alarm group settings
Alarm group name

Alm/Grp Name: 0297, Engineering

Text No:

Every alarm group can be programmed with a name to identify the alarm group.
The words are selected from a list already held by the ATS system. They can be
either from the list of standard words available (see Table 9 on page 105), or
from a list of words that you have programmed yourself (see “10-Program text”
on page 103).
The display shows the current alarm group name, preceded by its reference
number).

Areas assigned

1,2,3,5,7,8,9,
Area:

Assign the areas to be controlled by the alarm group. An alarm group can only
control the functions of areas that are assigned to it.

User alarm group

No-Can this GRP Be Assigned To Users

*-Change 0-Skip:

Define if the alarm group can be assigned to users, or only to zones and RAS’s.
Yes: This alarm group can be assigned to users. The group is displayed in the
list of alarm groups when creating a user in user menu 14-Users. This option is
not set for alternate user alarm groups.
No: This alarm group is for a zone, door or RAS.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: An alarm group is only displayed in User Codes when the user who is
creating a new user has at least the same options (includes check of alternate
alarm group). A user cannot create a code for another user who has higher
security clearance.

Alarm system control

YES – Alarm System Control

*-Change 0-Skip:

This record lets you assign alarm system control functions to a user, door or
RAS. Only when alarm system control is enabled can users arm or disarm areas
in the alarm group.

52 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Yes: Alarm system control is enabled. Users, doors or RAS’s can arm or disarm
the areas in the alarm group.
No: No alarm system control available. Access control functions and any user
menu options specified are still valid.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: You must set this record to Yes if any of the alarm group restrictions in the
Alarm Group are set to Yes.

List of areas

NO – Prompt With List of Areas

*-Change 0-Skip:

Select whether the areas assigned to a user are displayed during the arm/disarm
procedures.
Yes: After the user has entered a PIN and pressed On or Off, the areas assigned
to the user are displayed. The user can then select from the arm/disarm options
(e.g., specific areas, all areas, etc.).
This feature is useful when a user can control several areas but usually only
arms/disarms specific areas.
No: The areas assigned to the user are not displayed. Areas are immediately
armed/disarmed once the user has entered a PIN and pressed On or Off.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Keypad duress

NO-Can User Activate Keypad Duress

*-Change 0-Skip:

Enables the use of the duress facility using a code.

Yes: A code can be entered on a keypad to activate duress.
No: Duress cannot be activated. A duress code is treated as an invalid code.
Refer to the Manager Manual for further information on duress.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Reset system alarm

NO – Reset System Alarms

*-Change 0-Skip:

This record allows the alarm group to reset latching system alarms. System
alarms are conditions, such as DGP tamper, siren fail, low battery, report fail, etc.
Yes: A user with this alarm group can reset the latching system alarms.
No: A user cannot reset latching system alarms.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 53

Note: If this record is set at Yes, “Alarm system control” on page 52 must also be
set to Yes and “Latching system alarms” on page 74 has to be set to Yes (see “7-
System options”).

Disable auto-uninhibit

NO – Disable Auto-Uninhibit
*-Change 0-Skip:

Determines that inhibited zones are uninhibited on disarming the area the zone
belongs to.
Yes: Disarming the area will not automatically uninhibit zones in the area. Used
for cleaners, etc.
No: Disarming the area will automatically uninhibit zones.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: “Auto uninhibit on disarm” on page 73 in “7-System options” has to be set
to Yes.

Restricted To Arm & Reset

NO – Restricted To Arm & Reset

*-Change 0-Skip:

Restricts alarm control to arm and alarm reset only.

Yes: Only arm and reset are allowed.
No: There are no alarm control restrictions.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available..
Note: “Alarm system control” on page 52 has to be set to Yes

Disarm only

NO – Restricted To Disarm Only

*-Change 0-Skip:

Restricts alarm control to disarm only.

Yes: Only disarm is allowed.
No: There are no alarm system control restrictions.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: “Alarm system control” on page 52 has to be set to Yes

Alarm reset only

NO – Restricted To Reset Only

*-Change 0-Skip:

Restricts alarm control to alarm reset only.

54 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Yes: Only reset alarm is allowed.
No: There are no alarm system control restrictions.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: “Alarm system control” on page 52 has to be set to Yes

Auto inhibit active zones

NO – Auto Inhibit Active Zones

*-Change 0-Skip:

Determines if active zones on arming have to be automatically inhibited.

Yes: When the arming starts, all active zones are automatically inhibited and the
system is armed without causing an alarm.
No: The system cannot be armed if there are active zones, unless Forced Arming
is set to Yes (see next menu item).
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: “Alarm system control” on page 52 has to be set to Yes

Forced arming when active

NO-Forced Arming When Zones Active

*-Change 0-Skip:

Arm areas with active zones.

Yes: The check for active zones is ignored and if there are active zones when the
arming procedure is started, the system still arms (the zones remain active and,
depending on the zone type, might cause an alarm).
No: The system cannot be armed if there are active zones (unless Auto Inhibit
(see previous menu item) is set to Yes).
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Prevent forced disarming

NO – Prevent Forced Disarming

*-Change 0-Skip:

Prevents disarming when there are active zones. It is used when there are
Disarmed Alarm zone types such as type 1 and type 11 in the system.
Yes: Area(s) cannot be disarmed if there are active zones of type I or II
No: Area(s) can be disarmed even if there are active zones of type I or II
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 55

Modem access

NO – Can User Access Via Modem

*-Change 0-Skip:

Allows access to the ATS panel via a dial-up modem.

Yes: Modem access with VT100 terminal (or terminal emulation software) is
allowed by a user with this alarm group. RAS 16 must have a suitable alarm
group assigned to specify the functions available (e.g. Alm Grp 2) and be
programmed as a LCD arming station (does not need to be polled). This option
does not apply to upload/download software.
No: Modem access with VT100 terminal (or terminal emulation software) is not
allowed by a user with this alarm group.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

Alarm group restriction 1

No –User Has Alm/Grp Restriction 1

*-Change 0-Skip:

Alarm group restrictions give certain restrictions to alarm groups. Only 1

restriction is available per alarm group. However, every alarm group can use the
same restriction.
Alarm group restrictions restrict alarm control to timed disarm or arm/reset.
Yes: The alarm group restrictions are activated.
No: The alarm group restrictions are not activated.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
Note: Only one restriction is allowed per alarm group.
See also “15-Alarm group restrictions” on page 118.

Alarm group restriction 2

See “Alarm group restriction 1”.

Alarm group restriction 3

See “Alarm group restriction 1”.

Alarm group restriction 4

See “Alarm group restriction 1”.

Alarm group restriction 5

See “Alarm group restriction 1”.

Alarm group restriction 6

See “Alarm group restriction 1”.

56 Advisor Master Programming Guide

AlmGrp restriction 7, Emergency

No –User Has Alm/Grp Restr7 - Emergency

*-Change 0-Skip:

Operates as alarm group restriction 1, but on a timed disarm it will report an

Emergency Alarm when the area arms again.
Yes: The alarm group restrictions are activated.
No: The alarm group restrictions are not activated.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
See also “15-Alarm group restrictions” on page 118 and “Alarm group restriction
1”.

AlmGrp restriction 8, Counter

No –User Has Alm/Grp Restr 8 - Counter

*-Change 0-Skip:

Operates as alarm group restriction 1, but on disarming it will increase a counter.

When the area is armed using this alarm group it will decrease the counter.
When the counter reaches 0, it will arm the areas in the alarm group.
Yes: The alarm group restrictions are activated.
No: The alarm group restrictions are not activated.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.
See also “15-Alarm group restrictions” on page 118 and “Alarm group restriction
1”.

No arming if restriction not timing

NO – No Arming If Restr. Not Timing

*-Change 0-Skip:

Prevents the alarm group restriction timer to arm the areas if a user without
restriction has disarmed the areas.
Yes: If an area has been disarmed and there is no alarm group restriction timer
running, an alarm group restriction timer cannot be started.
When an alarm group restriction timer expires, it arms the area. By setting this
option you prevent an area from being armed if a user without alarm group
restriction originally has disarmed it.
No: Normal alarm group restrictions apply.
Press 0 to go to timezone.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 57

Change own PIN only

NO – Change own PIN only

*-Change 0-Skip:

Allows the user (if he has access to Menu 14- program users) to change his own
PIN. All other menus of Delete, Display and Create will be absent. The user
cannot see nor display even his own Alarm Group, Door Group, Floor Group or
User name.
Yes: The user can change his own PIN.
No: The user can change the PINs of other users and can access the Menu 14
menus of Delete, Display and Create.
If the “Change own PIN only” option is set to Yes and if the system option
“Disable code from displaying” on page 76 is set to No, then the display will show
the following, if 1111 is the actual PIN.

PIN Code: 1111

Code:

The user enters his new PIN.

PIN Code: 1111

Code: 1234

Followed by entering:

PIN Code: 1234

Code:

The user can change the code again, or press Enter to exit.
If the “Change own PIN only” option is set to Yes and if the System Option
“Disable code from displaying” is set to Yes, then the display will show the
following:

PIN Codes Can Not Be Displayed

Code:

The user can then enter his new PIN and will be asked to confirm.

PIN Codes Can Not Be Displayed

Code: ****

Confirm PIN Code:

Code: ****

The user can change the code again, or press Enter to exit.

PIN Codes Can Not Be Displayed

Code:

58 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Allow Stop Voice reporting
The authorisation for the user to have the ability to stop voice reporting is
selectable via the RAS’s assigned alarm group upon disarming.
Yes: User is allowed to stop the voice reporting (in most cases on areas
assigned to the RAS in use.) Note: Only if the user has a valid alarm group.
No: The user is not allowed to stop the voice reporting.
Press 0 to go to the user menu items available.

User menu options

YES-1-Panel Status
*-Change 0-Skip:

Determines if the user menu item is available in this alarm group to users or
RAS’s.
Each user menu is displayed and must be set to Yes for it to be available to the
alarm group. The user menus available for selection are:

Table 8: User menu options available

1. Panel status 15. Time & Date
2. Active Zones 16. Isolate/De-isolate RAS/DGP
3. Zones In Alarm 17. Authorization Service In
4. Inhibited Zones 18. Reset Cameras
5. History 19. Installer Programming
6. Test Report 20. Door and Floor Groups
7. Service Menu 21. Holidays
8. Film Counters 22. Open Door
9. List Zone Names 23. Unlock, Lock, Disable and Enable
10. Inhibit Zone 24. Print History
11. Uninhibit Zone 25. TML Menu Entry
12. Test zone 26. Chime options
13. Start Auto Disarm test 27. HSR management
14. Program Users

See the Advisor Master Manager’s Manual for further information on each option.
Press 0 to go to timezone.

Timezone

Alm-Grp 14 Timezone 4
Timezone:

Determines the timezone that applies to this alarm group. The alarm group is
only available if the timezone is valid.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 59

For information on operating timezones, see “13-Timezones” (page 113), and
“22-Timezone to follow output” (page 137).

Alternate alarm group

Grp 14 Alt-Grp 12 - Night Shift

Alm-Grp:

You can program each alarm group to have an alternate alarm group. The
alternate alarm group is used whenever the original alarm group is disabled due
to an invalid timezone. The alternate alarm group can have other areas or menus
as the original alarm group.
Example: During normal working hours, users can arm and disarm from a list.
After hours, only arm/alarm reset is allowed without presenting a list of areas.
Notes
• The alternate alarm group can also be programmed with an alternate alarm
group and so on - up to three alarm groups (the original plus two alternates).
If a function is denied by the timezone of one alarm group, the next will be
checked, etc.
• When alternate alarm groups are active and these have alarm group
restrictions, the alternate alarm group restrictions apply. See also 15-Alarm
group restrictions on page 118.

User level

Alm-Grp 31 User Level 0

A read-only option User level allows you to discriminate between the user access
levels. The following values are available:
• Disabled (standard ATS panel user - has no overriding capability)
• Level 2 user
• Level 3 user
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 2 level 2 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
• Battery low or missing (this includes any DGP)
• All signalling paths in fault
• All warning devices and all signalling paths in fault
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 2 level 3 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
• Battery low or missing (this includes any DGP)
• All signalling paths in fault

60 Advisor Master Programming Guide

• All warning devices and all signalling paths in fault
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 3 level 2 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
• Battery low or missing (this includes any DGP)
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 3 level 3 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
• Battery low or missing (this includes any DGP)
• All signalling paths in fault
• All warning devices and all signalling paths in fault
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 4 level 2 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
Items that prevent setting but may be overridden by the Grade 4 level 3 user:
• Detector masked
• Detector fault
• AC mains fail (this includes any DGP)
• Battery low or missing (this includes any DGP)
• All signalling paths in fault
• All warning devices and all signalling paths in fault

User Can Override Line Fault

NO-User can override Line Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

When programmed to YES, the user associated with this alarm group (regardless
of user level or the panel security grade) is able to override the Line Fault
condition where all communication paths have failed. If the condition is
overridden, the action will be logged to the history database.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 61

6-Timers
Program all system wide timers in this section.
Notes
• Timers are accurate on ±1 of the value entered. So a timer set for 20
seconds, will end somewhere between 19 and 21 seconds. Consequently,
avoid using values of 1 second or 1 minute.
• If a timer is set to 0, that timer will not be used.

Timer settings
AG restriction 1 disarmed time

Alm/Grp Restr.1 Disarmed is (Min). 0

Time:

You need to program the individual times (from 0 to 255 minutes) for each alarm
group restriction 1 to 7 for the time it is disarmed. The alarm group restriction has
to be programmed for timed disarm and be assigned to an alarm group.
Notes
• If set to 0, the area(s) will not re-arm automatically. See “15-Alarm group
restrictions” on page 118 for more information.
• The alarm group restriction time will be over-ridden by the “Area disarmed
time” on page 34 (if programmed) in the Area database.

AG restriction 2 disarmed time

See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” above.

AG restriction 3 disarmed time

See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” above.

AG restriction 4 disarmed time

See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” above.

AG restriction 5 disarmed time

See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” above.

AG restriction 6 disarmed time

See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” above.

62 Advisor Master Programming Guide

AG restriction 7 disarmed time

Alm/Grp Restr.7 Disarmed is (Min). 0

Time:

After the disarmed time has expired, not only the area(s) are armed, but also an
emergency alarm will be sent to the central station.
See “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” on page 62 and “15-Alarm group
restrictions” on page 118.

AG restriction 8 disarmed time

Alm/Grp Restr.8 ** NOT USED **

Time:

The disarmed time for alarm group restriction 8 does not have any significance,
because the system ignores any values entered here. Alarm group restriction 8,
when used counts every user disarming and arming again. The timer is internally
set to 0.
See “15-Alarm group restrictions” on page 118.

Disarm test time

Disarm Test Set To (Min) 15

Time:

Determines the test time available to perform the disarm test (0 to 255 minutes).
See “7-System options” on page 70, and “1-Zone database” on page 7 for more
information on testing zones.

Arm test time

Arm Test Set To (Min) 15

Time:

Determines the test time available to perform the arm test (0 to 255 minutes).

Warning time

Warning Time Is Set To (Min) 15

Time:

When alarm group restrictions are used and areas are programmed for timed
disarm, a warning will sound (if a warning time is programmed) indicating the
areas are about to arm. The duration this warning will sound is programmed in
this menu (0 to 255 minutes)
When a warning time is set, an audible alert is provided for the warning period
preceding the expiry. It MUST always be shorter than the shortest alarm group
restriction time.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 63

Notes
• Always set the warning time to a time shorter than any Alarm group restriction
disarmed time.
• See “15-Alarm group restrictions” on page 118 and “AG restriction 1 disarmed
time” on page 62.

Disarmed alarm delay time

Disarmed Alm Delay Time Set To (Sec). 60

Time:

Determines the delay time (0 to 255 seconds) before an alarm from a delayed
disarmed alarm is reported to the central station. The delay time is ignored if
another delayed zone type has already been activated.
Note: The delay is available for zone types 8, 11, 22 and 40. See “1-Zone
database” on page 7 for more information.

Suspicion time

Suspicion Time Is Set To (Sec). 15

Time:

The suspicion time is the length of time that a camera continues to operate after
a suspicion zone type has switched to normal state. The zone types that use this
record are 7, 40, and 47.
The suspicion time is available for zone types 7, 40 and 47. See “1-Zone
database” on page 7 for more information.

Service time available

Service Time Is Set To (Min). 30

Time:

User menu 17 can be used to give access to service technicians. The alarm
group for the technician needs timezone 25 to be assigned. When a user enables
the service technician, timezone 25 will be valid during the service time (0 to
255 min).
Note: See “5-Alarm groups” on page 50, “13-Timezones” on page 113, and
Advisor Master Manager Manual.

Local alarm reminder time

Local Alarm Reminder Time (Min). 5

Time:

The time that can elapse between acknowledging a local alarm and a re-alarm
occurring, including the audible alert (if the cause of the local alarm is not fixed).
Note: See “2-Area database” on page 29, and Advisor Master Manager Manual,
“Local alarms”, for further information

64 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Individual zone test time

Individual Testmode Time (Min). 5

Time:

Enter the maximum time (0 to 255 minutes) to perform a test on an individual

zone, using user menu Test zone.
Note: See the manager guide, user menu Test zone for more information.

Doors unlock time

Door(s) Unlock Time (Sec). 5

Time:

The time doors will unlock (using the door event flag) in order to allow doors to
be opened. This time value is common for all door event flags from RAS’s
connected to the ATS system, i.e. doors 1 to 16. Doors 17 to 64 are connected to
ATS1250/1260 4-DoorDGP’s that are individually programmed in the DGP.
Note: See also “3-RAS database” on page 39.

Testing event flag time

Testing Event Flag Time (Sec). 15

Time:

Specify the time the testing event flag is triggered to activate devices in order to
perform an arm test. The event flag will only be triggered for half the programmed
time. The remaining time is used to allow the device to switch back to normal
state.
The event flag used is preset to 16.
More on event flags in “Event Flags” on page 179.

External siren set to

External Siren Set to (Min)

Time:

This option specifies the amount of time (0 to 255 minutes) that the on-board
external siren drivers activate. The maximum time is 255 minutes.
See “1-Zone database” on page 7 and “2-Area database” on page 29 for more
information.

Internal siren set to

Internal Siren Set to (Min)

Time:

This option specifies the amount of time (0 to 255 minutes) that the on-board
internal siren drivers activate. The maximum time is 255 minutes.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 65

See “1-Zone database” on page 7 and “2-Area database” on page 29 for more
information.

Siren delay set to

Siren Delay Set to (Min)

Time:

This option allows you to set the delay time (0 to 255 minutes) before the sirens
actually activate after an alarm has occurred. This can be used for recording any
sounds before the siren activates.
The siren delay is set to 0.

Mains fail delay time

Mains Fail Delay Time (Min). 10

Time:

The delay time (0 to 255 minutes) before a Mains Fail is reported to the central
station. Enter a value of “0” for no delay.
See also “34-Program system event flags” on page 154 and “9-Communication
options” on page 94.

Delay reporting alarms for

Delay Report Alarms for (Sec). 0

Time:

The delay time (0 to 255 seconds) before a burglar alarm (BA) or BA Class
Tamper Alarm (TA) is reported to the central station. Can be used to prevent
alarm reporting for users that have problems disarming their area in time. After a
burglar alarm or input tamper activation, there will be a delay of 20 seconds
before the burglar alarm (BA) or BA Class Tamper Alarm (TA) will be reported to
the Central Station. All other (non-BA & non-TA) Alarms are reported
immediately, without delay.

A to B alarm delay (ACPO)

A to B Alarm Delay (ACPO) for (Sec). 0

Time:

The delay time (0 to 255 seconds) that the system waits for a second alarm. If
the second alarm happens within the delay time, it will be reported as a verified
alarm.
Note: See also “A&B alarm reporting (ACPO)” on page 35 in “2-Area database”.

66 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Screensaver timeout time

Screensaver Timeout (Sec). 0

Time:

The screen saver timeout value will be in the range of 5 to 180 seconds with an
accuracy of 1 second. The screen saver timer will be reset with the programmed
period every time a RAS key is pressed when the screen saver is not active. The
system user can also activate the screen saver manually by pressing the CLEAR
key at the Enter Code prompt.

RAS card & PIN timeout

RAS Card & PIN Timeout (Sec).

Time:

Allows you to set the delay time (0 to 255 seconds) between badging the card
and entering the PIN (default is 8 seconds).

Double knock interval (min)

Double Knock Interval (Min).

Time:

If enabled for a particular zone, Double Knock Interval specifies the maximum
permitted time a zone may remain active. If the time for which a zone remains
active exceeds the permitted time, an alarm condition is registered. If this value is
set to zero (‘0’), an alarm is not generated by prolonged activation, but is
determined by Double Knock Interval.

Double knock duration (sec)

Double Knock Duration (Sec).

Time:

If enabled for a particular zone, Double Knock Duration specifies the maximum
permitted time a zone may remain active. If the time for which a zone remains
active exceeds the permitted time, an alarm condition is registered. If this value is
set to zero (‘0’), an alarm is not generated by prolonged activation, but is
determined by Double Knock Interval.

Reserved

Arm complete time (sec)

Arm Complete Time (sec).

Time:

When the setting procedure has been satisfactorily completed there is a time
limited completion of setting indication to show the system or part thereof has
changed to a set state. A common (global) timer setting is used to initialise each
area timer at the beginning of the confirmation period.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 67

Disarm complete time (sec)

Disarm Complete Time (sec).

Time:

When the unsetting procedure has been satisfactorily completed there is a time
limited completion of unsetting indication to show the system or part thereof has
changed to an unset state. A common (global) timer setting is used to initialise
each area timer at the beginning of the confirmation period.

Abort time (sec)

Abort Time (sec). 30

Time:

An additional system “Abort Timer” for entry fault reporting is implemented to

create an additional delay of 30 seconds (programmable from 0 to 255) after the
entry time has been expired before the entry fault is reported.

RAS lockout time

RAS Lockout Time (sec). 90

Time:

Allows you to set the time, for which the RAS becomes locked after a code
tamper. The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds.
See also “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44.

Chime time is set to

Chime Time Is Set To (sec). 90

Time:

The active time for the chime event flag. If applicable, this time is also applied to
the RAS chime buzzer duration. For more information see System Options >
“Enable chime” on page 87.

Reserved

Computer access time

Computer Access Time (min). 60

Time:

This field has an effect only when “Authorize computer connection” option on
page 147 is set. The option specifies how long the special authorization for
computer connection is valid. The default value is 60 min meaning that after the
installer authorizes the computer connection, the authorization is valid for
60 minutes.

68 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Access time for PIN of the day

Access Time For PIN Of The Day (Min):

Time:

Enter the time in minutes, for which the provided response code is valid and the
new code is not required. See “PIN of the day option” on page 89 for more
information.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 69

7-System options
Program options common to the complete system.

Configuring system options

Areas selected for total disarm

16
Disarm Areas:

24-hour zone types (Disarmed Alarm or Firedoor) can be completely disarmed

using this menu. If the areas entered here are disarmed, 24-hour zone types are
inhibited. For best functionality, assign a common area to the 24-hour zone type
(its own area and the area programmed here). Disarm the programmed area to
disable the zone(s).
For example:
Zone 6 is a vault sensor in a vault. It is programmed as zone type 5 (24 hour)
and is assigned to areas 1 and 16. Area 16 is programmed for total disarm.
When servicing the vault, area 16 will be disarmed. From that moment on until
area 16 is armed again, zone 6 will be disabled (except for tamper alarms). Now
the following can occur:

Area 1 Area 16 Zone 6 behaviour

Armed Armed normal operation (as programmed zone type)
Disarmed Armed normal operation (as programmed zone type)
Armed Disarmed Zone disabled (except for tamper)
Disarmed Disarmed Zone disabled (except for tamper)

Note: When using this option, make sure the areas programmed for total disarm
can only be disarmed under correct conditions.

Film low level

Film Low Is Set To 0800

Film Level:

The film level number programmed is the film frame count. When this frame
count is reached, a film low is reported to the central station. Used for still video
or photo-cameras.
Note: Relates to zone types 23-26 and 36-39 (camera count). See “1-Zone
database” on page 7.

70 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Film out level

Film Out Is Set To 1100

Film Level:

The film level number programmed is the film frame count. When this frame
count is reached, an out of film is reported to the central station. This option is
related to the camera count zone types 23 to 26 and 36 to 39.
Note: Relates to zone types 23 to 6 and 36 to 39 (camera count). See “1-Zone
database” on page 7.

Test mode

1, Enable Auto Test

Option:

The test mode determines if or when an arm or disarm tests has to be performed
(formerly called walktest).
There are four options available. An option is programmed using its reference
number.

Option Function
0. No Test No automatic tests. A disarm test can be performed using User
menu 13, Start auto disarm test.
1. Enable Auto Test The disarm or arm test starts automatically when the system is
disarmed or armed.
2. Manual Disarm Test/Auto The arm test starts automatically when the system is armed. The
Arm Test disarm test can only be done using User menu 13, Start auto
disarm test.
3. Auto Disarm Test Only The disarm test starts automatically when the system is
disarmed. No arm test is available.

Notes
• For the "Auto disarm test" to operate, the area(s) containing the zones to test
have to be programmed as vaults. See “18-Vaults” on page 129.
• This record does not affect manual testing of any individual zone (User
menu 12). See Advisor Master Manager Manual.

No. of output controllers

Number Of Output Controllers: 2

How Many:

Enter the number of output controllers that are fitted to the main control panel
(J14, see Advisor Master Installation Guide). An output controller has 8 outputs
available.
Valid values:
• 0: No output controller or a 4-way relay (ATS1810).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 71

• 1 to 32: Indicates the number of output controllers (ATS1811). The 16-way
open collector card (ATS1820) takes up 2 controllers.
Do not enter values here for output controllers fitted to DGP’s.

Zone event text

Zone Text: 0103, Gate

Text No:

When zone types 57 and 58 are active, this zone event text will be displayed on
LCD keypads. The text is taken from the text word library and is programmed as
a reference number. A free programmable text can be programmed using “10-
Program text” on page 103.
The zone event text only appears when the zones are active, for example
“Freezer open”.
See also “1-Zone database” on page 7 and “10-Program text” on page 103.

Alarm code prefix

No Alarm Code Prefix

No Digits:

The alarm code prefix enables user codes to be used for both access control and
alarm control. The prefix indicated the number of digits that have to be entered to
have alarm control. If those digits are not entered, only access control can be
performed.
For example: If the alarm code prefix is two digits and a users PIN is 123456,
then you would enter 123456 for alarm control or 3456 for access control. A
value between one to four digits can be entered.
Note: The minimum PIN length entered has to be 4 digits. The total length of a
users PIN is 4 + alarm code prefix.

LCD rotation delay

LCD Rotation Delay Is 0

Time:

The time before text on the LCD display starts rotating can be altered. The
default value 0, which is equal to 8.
Any value from 9 to 15 increases the time before text rotation starts.
Any value from 1 to 7 decreases the time before text rotation starts.
Note: This option can only be programmed for LCD arming stations, like
ATS1100.

72 Advisor Master Programming Guide

LCD rotation speed

Rotate Speed Is 0
Time:

Not only the time before text rotation starts can be altered, but also the speed
with which the text rotates. The faster the speed, the harder to read. But when
the speed is too slow, long texts might take too long to show. The default value 0,
which is equal to 8.
Any value from 9 to 15 decreases the text rotation speed.
Any value from 1 to 7 increases the text rotation speed.
Note: This option can only be programmed for LCD arming stations, like the
ATS1100.

Dual zone

NO – Dual zone
*-Change 0-Skip

Determines if dual zone is used. For dual zone to operate, every zone needs two
resistors of 4,7 kΩ. This enables the panel to detect whether a zone is in normal
state, is active or is tampered.
Yes: Dual zone used: Normal = 4k7; Tamper = Open or Short; Active = 2k35 or
9k4.
No: No dual zone; Normal = 4k7; Alarm = Open or Short or 2k35 or 9k4.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
Note: End of line resistors have to be connected to the zone. See the installation
guide.

Auto uninhibit on disarm

NO – Auto Uninhibit When Area Disarmed

*-Change 0-Skip

Determine if zones are automatically uninhibited if the area is disarmed.

However, this option is only valid if the alarm group allows automatic uninhibit.
Yes: Zones in normal state and inhibited are uninhibited when any of the areas
assigned to the zone are disarmed. This is done to ensure that inhibited zones
are not ignored or overlooked.
No: Zones in normal state and inhibited are not uninhibited when any of the
areas assigned to the zone are disarmed.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See also “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 73

Display one zone at a time

NO – Display One Zone at a Time

*-Change 0-Skip

This record controls the way zone names and numbers are displayed on the LCD
during user functions.
Yes: One zone at a time is displayed even though there may be more than one in
the list of zones to be displayed. The user must scroll through the zones. eg.
Active 2. Building 1 Workshop PIR.
No: Zones are displayed as a list of numbers and it is necessary to select the
zone number to display the individual zone name. eg. Active 1, 2, 3.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Username file

YES – Username File

*-Change 0-Skip

Determines if users have names with their PINs programmed. Only users 1 to
200 can have a name with their PIN (if memory extension available).
Yes: The appropriate prompts for programming a username, are displayed when
programming user codes.
No: The appropriate prompts for programming a username, are not displayed
when programming user codes.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See also Advisor Master Manager Manual regarding programming users.

System alarms set siren and strobe

NO – System Alarms Set Siren & Strobe

*-Change 0-Skip

Indicate whether system alarms should activate siren and strobe.

Yes: The dedicated tamper zones on the ATS control panel and the DGP’s
activate the siren and strobe when in alarm.
No: The system alarms report and activate event flags (if programmed) only.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Latching system alarms

NO – Latching System Alarms

*-Change 0-Skip

System alarms are RAS/DGP Offline, cabinet tamper, siren tamper, mains fail,
fuse fail, low battery, etc.

74 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Yes: System alarms latch and require a code to reset. If set to Yes, ensure that
users who have the appropriate authority are assigned an alarm group that has
"Reset System Alarms" set to Yes.
No: System alarms automatically reset and report restoral when the alarm
condition is no longer present.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
Note: Remember to program the users alarm group with “Reset system alarms”
set to Yes. See “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.

Siren testing

NO – Test Siren
*-Change 0-Skip

Enable a siren test when the arm test is started.

Yes: The sirens are tested for three seconds when the arm test is started.
No: Sirens are not tested when the arm test is started.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See “Test mode” in “7-System options” on page71.

Disable "0, ENTER" for camera reset

NO – Disable 0 ENTER For Camera Reset

*-Change 0-Skip

Defines the procedure to stop cameras from operating. See the Manager Manual
for more information.
Yes: 0, Enter can not be used to stop cameras operating. The cameras continue
to operate until someone who is authorised to control cameras, resets them.
No: 0, Enter stops the cameras operating (after pressing Enter, Enter for the
"Quick alarm log".
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See also Advisor Master Manager Manual regarding alarms, camera’s and alarm
logs.

Disable insert of AG restriction

NO – Disable Insert Of Alm/Grp Restr.

*-Change 0-Skip

Disables the option to treat areas as vaults. By disabling this option, the non-
vault areas will not be automatically armed.
Yes: Disables the special procedure for automatically timing on non-vault areas
when arming vaults.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 75

No: Enables the special procedure for automatically timing on non-vault areas
when arming vaults, provided all the applicable values are programmed.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See “18-Vaults” on page 129.

Reserved

Disable code from displaying

NO – Disable Code From Displaying

*-Change 0-Skip

Disable display of the PIN when programming users

Yes: PINs are not visible (except for master installer). The display shows “PINs
can not be viewed”.
No: PINs are visible to.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See also Advisor Master Manager Manual regarding programming codes.

Disable flashing area LEDs

NO – Disable Flashing Area LEDs

*-Change 0-Skip

Indicate if area LED’s should flash when there is an alarm and/or tamper alarm in
the area.
Yes: The area LED will not flash on alarm.
No: The area LED will flash on alarm.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Two users before programming code

NO – Two Users before Programming Code

*-Change 0-Skip

Determines that two users are required to enter their PIN to enable programming
of users (user menu 14). When entering this option, a request for a second PIN is
shown before access is granted.
User 50 (Master code) is not required to have a second code to authorise the
option.
Yes: Two users are required to enter their PIN before access is granted to
program users.
No: No validation is needed when entering user menu 14, Program users.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

76 Advisor Master Programming Guide

See Advisor Master Manager Manual for more information on programming
users.

Display alarms instantly on LCD

NO – Display Alarm Instant On LCD

*-Change 0-Skip

Indicate if alarms should be displayed immediately on LCD.

Yes: Details of the first alarm are displayed instantly on the LCD arming station.
Details of other alarms can be viewed on the LCD arming station by pressing the
Enter key twice.
No: Details of all alarms can be viewed on the LCD arming station by pressing
the Enter key twice.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Sirens only after FTC

NO – Sirens Only After Report Fail (FTC)

*-Change 0-Skip

When set to Yes, Siren event flags are only activated on alarms if the ATS
control panel has failed to report to the central station. Fail To Report (FTC) is
registered at the end of the fourth dial attempt. The siren activates for the normal
siren cut-off time programmed.
Yes: Sirens will only activate on alarms when a FTC has occurred.
No: Sirens will operate on alarms.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Financial options

NO – Financial Options
*-Change 0-Skip

Activates three special options (generally applicable to financial institution

installations):
• Film counters are enabled during the Disarm test mode.
• Alarm group restriction 2 or Alarm group restriction 6 disable delayed
Disarmed Alarm zones.
• Minimum PIN length is set to 5 digits.
Yes: Financial options enabled
No: Normal operation.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 77

Display user flags

NO – Display User Flags

*-Change 0-Skip

Enable the special user flags to be displayed when programming users. The
special user flags are Two Card function, Guard, Visitor, Trace User, Card only,
Privileged and Extended Access.
Yes: The special user flags are displayed in sequence after the "Floor group"
display when programming users.
No: The special user flags are not displayed.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See also Advisor Master Manager Manual for more information on users and
user flags.

Delayed disarmed alarm lockout

NO – Delayed Disarmed Alm Lockout

*-Change 0-Skip

This is only applicable to latching delayed disarmed alarms. If set to Yes, an

alarm can only be cancelled if the zone is in normal state. Therefore a latching
disarmed alarm is locked out until the alarm device is taken out of its latched
state (reset).
Yes: Delayed disarmed alarms are locked out until the alarm device is reset (and
the zone has switched to normal state).
No: Normal operation. Delayed disarmed alarms are not locked out.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Zone expansion fitted

NO – Zone Expansion Fitted

*-Change 0-Skip

Indicate if zone expanders (ATS1202) are fitted on the control panel (not for
ATS1201 DGP).
Yes: Zone expanders are fitted on the control panel.
No: No zone expanders fitted.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.
See Advisor Master Installation Guide for information on fitting zone expanders
on the control panel.

78 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Inhibit zone tamper

NO – Inhibit zone tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

Zone tampers in default programming will be inhibited when a zone is inhibited.

Yes: When a zone is inhibited, also the tamper is inhibited. No tamper alarm will
occur anymore.
No: An inhibited zone will only have inhibited alarms. Tamper alarms will still
occur.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Report multiple alarms

NO – Report Multiple Alarms In Zone

*-Change 0-Skip

The system is able to report multiple alarms that occurred in a zone (depending
on the reporting format).
Yes: Report multiple alarms as a separate alarm for each alarm that occurs.
No: Only report the first alarm. Every next alarm that occurs will not be reported.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Report multiple restores

NO – Report Each Restored Multiple Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

The system is able to generate a restore for each alarm being reported, even for
multiple alarms in a zone.
Yes: Report a restore for every alarm that occurred.
No: Report only one restore for every zone that generated an alarm.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Engineer reset for system alarms

NO – Engineer Reset for System Alarms

*-Change 0-Skip

If an engineer reset is required on system alarms, set this option to Yes. A user
can not arm any area until an engineer reset has been performed.
Yes: After a system alarm, an engineer reset is required.
No: No engineer reset required.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 79

How to perform an engineer reset
Whenever an engineer reset is required, and “User can do engineering reset”
option below is set to No, only the installer can perform the Engineering reset via
Installer Menu (19/51).

Engineer Reset?
*-Reset 0-Skip

Whenever an engineer reset is required, and “User can do engineering reset”

option below is set to Yes, the panel will display a 4-digit code. This code is a
reference to a special code that can be found in the Titan software package
(menu control) or received from your local distributor.

Engineer reset for system tampers

NO – Engineer Reset for System Tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

If an engineer reset is required on system tamper alarms, set this option to Yes.
A user can not arm any area until an engineer reset has been performed.
Yes: Engineer reset required on system tampers.
No: No engineer reset required.
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Ignore battery fault when arming

NO – Ignore Battery Fault when arming

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables to arm the system without any battery.

User can do engineering reset

NO – User can do Eng. Reset

*-Change 0-Skip

Set this option to Yes if an engineer reset is required. An engineer reset can then
be done by the user entering the ‘ATS System Code’ computed from the number
displayed on the RAS.
Note: This option by default does not allow users to perform an engineering
reset, except the Installer via Key-switch – Input type 65, Titan or Installer Menu
19/51.

Engineer entry protect

NO – Engineer Entry Protect

*-Change 0-Skip

This option protects against unauthorised entry by an installer. If set to Yes, you
can only enter menu (19) (Installer programming) by opening the box tamper

80 Advisor Master Programming Guide

within 120 seconds. “Open box tamper” will be displayed. During these
120 seconds or within the installer menus, the box tamper alarm is disabled.
When the installer menu is exited, the installer has 120 seconds to close the box
tamper. If not, the tamper alarm will be activated. The default is set to No.

Send arming after exit

YES – Send Arming After Exit

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, when armed, an area will defer the reporting of arming to the central
station until the exit time has ended.

User offset

User Offset Set to 0

Enter Offset

The offset is used to report user ID’s to management software. The offset is 0 to
65535. When a user ID is sent to the management package, this offset is added
or subtracted. The control panel itself uses the user ID without offset.

End of line resistor code

End Of Line Resistor Code 0

Code:

The End of line resistor code is used to set the correct value for the end of line
resistor used. By default this is set to 4,7 kΩ.

Option Resistor value

0 10 kΩ
1 4,7 kΩ
2 2 kΩ

Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Duress mode

Duress Mode 0
Mode:

Defines the way to activate duress. Two options are available.

• 0: Increment last digit
• 1: No duress
Press 0 to skip further options and leave system options.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 81

Siren Type

Option Siren Type

0 Speaker tone (standard AC tone)
1 Volts on (contant DC voltage)
2 Speaker or volts (multiple tone selection)

If siren type “0” has been selected, then when the 16th relay is activated, a saw
tooth signal is generated at the signal output. If siren type “1” has been selected,
then when the 16th relay is activated, a constant DC voltage is set at the siren
output. If siren type “2” has been selected, then the 12th, 13th, 14th, 15th and
16th relays are mapped to the siren output. These relays have priority 1 to 5
respectively. Hence relay 12 will have a higher priority over relay 16 when both
are active, thus generating a DC voltage at the siren output. The following
happens when the following relays are activated:
• 12th relay active = generates constant DC voltage at the siren output
• 13th relay active = generates a warble tone at the siren output
• 14th relay active = generates a sawtooth tone at the siren output
• 15th relay active = generates 2 tones at the siren output
• 16th relay active = generates an inverted sawtooth tone at the siren output

Inhibit alarm report on exit fault

YES – Inh. Alm. Rpt. On Exit Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

This option inhibits reporting of alarms with a reporting code of 17-24(burglar

alarm) when the exit timer is running. If set to Yes during the exit time, alarms on
inputs with reporting codes of 24 (burglar alarm) will set a flag to disable further
reporting. This is known as an ‘exit fault’. When the area is in Disarm, this flag is
reset. These inputs will log as ‘exit fault’ & ‘exit fault restore’ while the flag is set
or during the exit time. Burglar alarms in exit time will only activate the internal
siren.

Disable tamper report in disarm

YES – Disable Tamper Report in Disarm

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, a zone input tamper/restore will not report to the central station if
the assigned area(s) are disarmed. Similarly, system tampers/restores will not
report to the central station if all areas are disarmed. If a tamper occurs when the
area(s) are armed, this will report and send the restores when the areas are
disarmed.

82 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Inhibit ext.sir&strobe for disarm tamper

YES – Inh. Ext. Siren & Strobe in Disarm

Tampers
*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, zone input tampers will only activate the internal siren if the areas
are disarmed. System tampers operate similarly except that all areas are
disarmed.

ATS system code

ATS System Code

Code:

If the system code is 00000, the old algorithm is used to calculate the
engineering reset code. If not, the system code value and the engineering code
value are used in a special calculation to generate the reset code.
The default is set to 00000.

Soak test days

Days for Soak Test

Days:

This option sets the numbers of days for the soak test period. It can be set from 0
days to 255 days. Refer to “Enable soak test” on page 20 for more information.
The default is set to 7 days.

ACPO

NO – ACPO
*-Change 0-Skip

When this option is set, all alarms triggered within the entry time, provided an
entry/exit zone is triggered first, will be dealt with as an “A” Alarm. They will not
be reported to the CS before the entry time has elapsed. The first zone triggered
after the entry time has elapsed will be reported as an “A” Alarm. Any zone
triggered after that will be reported as a “B” Alarm.

EE confirm disable (ACPO)

NO – EE confirm disable (ACPO)

*-Change 0-Skip

When this option is set, all alarms triggered within the entry time, provided an
entry/exit zone is triggered first, will be dealt with as an “A” alarm. They will not
be reported to the CS before the entry time has elapsed. Any zone triggered after
the entry time has elapsed will be reported as an “A” alarm only.
Notes
• AB alarm option must be set to Yes in the area database.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 83

• Option “ACPO” described on page 83 must also be set to Yes.

Engineer reset on ACPO zone B alarm

NO – Eng Rst on ACPO Zone B Alarm

*-Change 0-Skip

When this option is set, you do not need an engineer reset when only an “A”
alarm has been triggered
Note: “A&B alarm reporting (ACPO)” on page 35 must be set to Yes.
Engineer reset for alarm must be set to Yes in zone database and system option.

NFA2P

YES – NFA2P
*-Change 0-Skip

Sets the panel to comply with the NFA2P requirement.

Installer dual code

YES – Installer Dual Code

*-Change 0-Skip

This option enables installer access authorisation by valid system user.

If this option is set to Yes, then a second, user code must be entered before
access to any menu is granted. The second code must be a valid user code with
no access to the installer menu.

Enter User Code

Code:

The second user must have Alarm System Control and not have access to
menu 19. If the second user does not meet these conditions, then the display will
show:

You Are Not Authorised To Enter

Press ENTER

When Enter is pressed, the display will return to the user menu.
Note: The function does not work and user code is not requested:
• When the system is in the Service In mode. See Manager Manual for more
details.
• If PIN of the day option is set to Yes. See “PIN of the day option” on page 89.

84 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Enable buzzer on mains/line fault

YES – Enable Buzzer on Mains/Line Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Keypad buzzer will be sounded when there is a mains/line fault.

No: Only the LED will flash.

Enable "Call Central Station" display

YES – Enable Call Central Station

*-Change 0-Skip

Informs the Central Station in the event of opening or closing faults. In case of a
burglar alarm or tamper activation and when the “delay reporting alarms” timer
has expired, the user will be informed after disarming by the text “Call Central
Station” on the LCD if the reporting to the Central Station was successful. This
displayed message “Call Central Station” shall only be displayed for 30 seconds,
and is only displayed on RAS’s linked to the AREA or AREAs that went into
Alarm. The user can decide to call the Central Station to inform the status i.e. on
opening or closing faults.

Exceptions
This text will not appear after reporting PANIC, HOLD-UP Alarms (HA) reports or
disarming by a Duress PIN. Also when a LINE FAULT is concurrently active, this
text will not appear.

Scandinavian indicators

YES – Scandinavian Indicators

*-Change 0-Skip

Allows the user to enable or disable the Scandinavian indicators.

Yes: Scandinavian Indicators option will be enabled.
No: Scandinavian Indicators option will not be enabled.

Enable log limitations

YES – Enable Log Limitations

*-Change 0-Skip

Limits the number of repeating intrusion events from the same source within the
same arm/disarm cycle. A limit of three (3) times has been set.
Input types excluded from log limitations are as follows: 6, 7, 9, 12, 16, 18, 19,
20, 23 to 27, 31, 32, 34 to 39, 57, 58, and 65.
These types are generally associated with access control, or have a special
function, and are not associated with the normal alarm functionality.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 85

Indicate inhibited zones

YES – Indicate Inhibited Zones

*-Change 0-Skip

Alerts the system user at the RAS with an optical and audible indication that
zones are inhibited in an area that is being armed. The inhibited zones need to
be listed and the user prompted with the option whether to arm the system or not.

Confirm area

1,2,4,5,7,8,
Confirm Area:

Defines areas to be processed as one alarm confirmation area (ACPO).

Eng Rst on ACPO zone B tamper

YES – Eng Rst on zone B tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables engineer reset lockout for ACPO zone tamper B-alarms.

Eng Rst on ACPO system B tamper

YES – Eng Rst on system B tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables engineer reset lockout for ACPO system B-tamper/offline.

Security grade
The Security grade option allows the panel behaviour to change based on the
grade level of the installation. The following grade levels are implemented:
• Disabled: Existing ATS panel behaviour
• Other: Low to medium risk installation
• Grade 3: Medium to high risk installation
There are conditions in the current panel implementation that already prevent
arming, and cannot be overridden (e.g. unsealed zone, zone/system alarm,
zone/system tamper, engineering reset). These conditions must be either
restored, or the zone/device inhibited, before arming can proceed.
In addition to the current conditions that prevent arming, there are additional
conditions that must prevent arming when the selected security grade is option 3.
When the security grade is not Disabled, these new conditions can prevent a
security system from arming, however, may be overridden by authorised users.
When an event is overridden, the event is logged to the alarm history database
including time and date, and the number of the user who performed the override.
To discriminate between the levels, use option “User level” (described on page
60) in the Alarm Group menu.
Note: Security grade 3 also sets minimum PIN length to 5 digits.

86 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Ignore AC mains fault when arming

NO – Ignore AC Mains Fault when arming

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables to arm the system without mains power supply.

Latch mains/battery/line faults

NO – Latch Mains/Battery/Line Faults

*-Change 0-Skip

When set to Yes, all conditions latch. Once latched, a user PIN is required to
reset the event. When this option is set to No, each event automatically clears
once the condition has been restored

Enable PA siren on FTC

NO – Enable PA Siren on FTC

*-Change 0-Skip

When set to Yes, and a Line Fault, or Fail-To-Communicate, condition exists, the
operation of a silent panic alarm changes to that of an audible panic alarm. When
the Line Fault, or FTC, restores, the silent panic alarm reverts to silent operation.

Latch AWDGP jam and supervision

NO – Latch AWDGP Jam and Supervision

*-Change 0-Skip

When set to Yes, and at least one area of the control panel is armed, the
jamming alarm condition will latch, and a user code is required to reset the
condition. To reset the jamming alarm, the user alarm group must permit the
reset of system alarms.
When this option is set to Yes, and the area with the AWDGP zone assigned is
armed, the long supervision / smoke supervision alarm on that zone will latch,
and a user code is required to reset the condition. To reset the long supervision /
smoke supervision alarm, the user alarm group must permit alarm reset.
When this option is set to No, the jamming alarm and supervision/smoke alarm
conditions are self-resetting when the condition restores. Regardless of this
setting, when the area is disarmed, only a device tamper condition will latch. All
other AWDGP fault and alarm conditions are non-latching, and automatically
restore when the condition clears.

Enable chime

YES – Enable Chime

*-Change 0-Skip

When set to Yes, chime/camera events are treated as chime events in Zones
and Areas databases. Otherwise these events are treated as camera events.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 87

This menu toggles between chime and camera event flag operation. When this
menu is set to Yes the chime/camera event flag, programmed in the zone and
area databases, is treated a chime event. When this is set to No, this event flag
is a camera event.
• Set this option to Yes,
• Ensure the zone type selected for chime can accept the chime function (see
“Zone type” on page 7),
• Enable the “Trigger chime/camera EF in area DB” on page 26 in the Zone
database for all chime zones,
• Programme a “Chime/camera event flag” on page 32 in the Area database,
• Programme the required Chime duration in Timers > “Chime time is set to” on
page 68,
• Programme the activating device for chime. Options: programme in the area
database a Chime activated RAS number (see “Chime on RAS” on page 38),
or assign the chime event flag to the keypad buzzers in System flags (see
“Keypad buzzer event flag” on page 156), or assign the Chime event flag to
an output number.

Synchronize DGP users records

YES – Synchronize DGP users records

*-Change 0-Skip

Synchronization allows restoring user record in DGP user database, if the card
number is missing.
If the DGP does not recognize a badge card, it queries this card in the ATS
panel. If the user exists in the ATS panel user database, the panel resends this
record to all DGPs.
This functionality allows connecting four-door DGP to the ATS panel without
downloading user database. Four -door DGP automatically learns user PINs,
alarm groups, etc. when a user presents his card first time.

Engineer reset on RAS lockout

NO – Engineer reset on RAS lockout

*-Change 0-Skip

If the Engineer reset on RAS lockout option is set to Yes, an engineer reset is
required to unlock a RAS lockout. Otherwise, the RAS is unlocked normally.
See also “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44.
For more information on engineer reset, refer to “Engineer reset for system
alarms” on page 79 and “User can do engineering reset” on page 80.

88 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Prevent arming on faults

YES – Prevent arming on faults

*-Change 0-Skip

Setting to Yes prevents arming on faults and events listed in the list below:
• Detector in active condition
• Tamper condition
• Detector range reduction
• Interconnection fault
• Auxiliary power source fault
Note: “Ignore battery fault when arming” on page 80 must be set to No.
• Primary power source fault
Note: “Ignore AC mains fault when arming” on page 87 must be set to No.
• Communication module fault
• Watchdog fault
• Exit fault
• Other alarm system component fault
The default is Yes.

PIN of the day option

Caution: Once this option is switched to Yes, it cannot be switched back to No.

YES – PIN Of The Day Option

*-Change 0-Skip

If PIN of the day option is set to yes, the installer can only enter the system with a
response code, which can be obtained from the appropriate security manager.
The code is calculated basing on the PIN of the day that is generated for the
particular session.

How to log in the system when the PIN of the day option is set to Yes:
1. Log in as an installer.
The following screen appears:

Challenge Code. Press ENTER

1234567890

2. Contact the security manager and give him the PIN of the day. Using
dedicated code calculating software, he generates the response code from
the Challenge code.
Press Enter.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 89

 Enter Response Code
PIN:

3. Enter response code, and then press Enter.

A single response code is valid during the time period defined in “Access time for
PIN of the day” on page 69.

Override AC mains fail

YES – Override AC Mains Fail

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override AC mains fault when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override battery fault

YES – Override Battery Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override battery fault when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override signalling fault

YES – Override Signalling Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override reporting fault when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override siren fail

YES – Override Siren Fail

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override siren fault when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override detector trouble

YES – Override Detector Trouble

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override detector trouble when arming.
The default value is Yes.

90 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Override tamper

YES – Override Tamper

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override tampers when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override interconnection fault

YES – Override Interconnection Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override interconnection fault when arming.
The default value is Yes.

Override RAS fault

YES – Override RAS Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override RAS fault when arming.
Note this does not apply for RAS offline scenario. (Offline RAS must be isolated
by installer to proceed arming).
The default value is Yes.

Override DGP fault

YES – Override DGP Fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the user can manually override DGP fault when arming.
Note that the overriding does not work if DGP is offline. Offline DGP must be
isolated by installer to proceed arming.
The default value is Yes.

Enable buzzer on alerts

NO-Enable buzzer on alerts

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the keypad provides a 5-second audible alert when user action is
necessary on a keypad in a disarmed state, usually when unacknowledged
alarms or faults are present. The alert reactivates after each period of time
programmed in “Local alarm reminder time” on page 64.
The audible alert only works on a keypad if:
• All areas assigned to the RAS are disarmed, and
• There are unacknowledged alarms or faults at least in one of areas assigned
to this RAS.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 91

To silence the buzzer once, press Clear.
See Advisor Master User Guide and Advisor Master Manager Manual for more
information on local alarms.

Internal siren on exit fault

NO – Internal siren on exit fault

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, an internal siren is activated if an exit fault has occurred.

Number of attempts for PIN of the day

Number Of Attempts For PIN Of The Day:

Enter the number of attempts that can be made to enter a responce code before
the keypad becomes locked and the code tamper occurs.
0 means that attemts are unlimited.
See “PIN of the day option” on page 89 for more information.

92 Advisor Master Programming Guide

8-Auto reset
Auto reset is a function to automatically reset alarms from an ATS control panel.

Auto reset settings

Auto reset time

Auto Reset Time (Mins): 15

Time (Mins):

The display shows the existing reset time. This is the amount of time that elapses
between the alarm occurring and reset.

Reset alarm group

Reset Alm-Grp: 35, Low priority Areas

Alm-Grp:

The control panel has to know which areas to auto reset. Using an alarm group
does this.
See also “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 93

9-Communication options
This menu is used to program all system-wide communication options.

Configuring communication options

PABX number

*-Pause, Ph No:
PABX:

A PABX number hold a number that precedes any other number being dialled.
Used only if the dialler is connected via a PABX to the telephone network.

How to program a telephone number

Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• ?, Enter: Enter the telephone number.
• Menu: Insert a pause or “T” in the telephone number.
• Menu, Menu, Enter: Clear the telephone number
• Enter: Save and display the number.

MSN number

*-Pause, Ph No:
MSN No:

For ISDN dialler, a MSN number can be programmed. This number is sent to the
ISDN network on dialling to a computer or central station.
See “PABX number” above.
MSN may not contain characters P and T, but only digits between 0 and 9.

Dial tone detection

This option allows you to select the type of dial tone detection: “disabled”,
“CTR21”, “Netherlands”, “UK” and “Other”.
If dial tone detection (DTD) is not disabled then:
• at the beginning of dialling process, or
• after dialling PABX number, or
• when a ‘ * ’ (star) character is spotted in the dialled number,
the dial tone detection will take place.

94 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Select tone dialling

YES – DTMF Tone Dialling

*-Change 0-Skip

Select tone or pulse dialling. For ISDN diallers, this option has no meaning.
Yes: Use tone dialling.
No: Use pulse dialling.

Enable PSTN line fault monitor

NO – Enable Line Monitor

*-Change 0-Skip

A line monitor will detect if the line voltage on the telephone network is within
limits. If not, a telephone line failure will occur.
Yes: Enable the line monitor.
No: Line monitor is disabled.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

Monitor service tones

NO – Monitor Service Tones

*-Change 0-Skip

Reserved for future use

Use 3 digit SIA extensions

YES – 3 Digit SIA Extensions

*-Change 0-Skip

Select if SIA reporting uses 2 or 3 digit zone, point or user numbers. When 2
digits are used, numbers above 99 will be converted to 99.
Yes: SIA reporting uses 3 digit numbers.
No: SIA reporting uses 2 digit numbers.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

ISDN point to point

NO – ISDN Point to Point

*-Change 0-Skip

This option allows you to select the point to point mode of operation for the plug-
in ISDN dialler.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 95

Enable ISDN line fault monitor

NO – Enable ISDN Line Fault Monitor

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to Yes, the line monitor will detect if the line condition on the telephone
network is within limits. If it is not, a telephone line fault condition will be
activated.

200 baud reverse area OP/CL

No– 200 Baud Reverse Area Open/Close

*-Change 0-Skip

If set to No, disarm events are reported as type “A” and arm events are reported
as type “R” (Default)
If set to Yes, disarm events are reported as type “R” and arm events are reported
as type “A”

X25 TEI value

X25 TEI Value

Value:

The X25 TEI value for the ISDN-D channel connection. The range is from 1
to 63.

Audio listen in time

Audio Listen In Time - 180

Time:

The total time in seconds that the panel will transmit audio to the monitoring
station. Note that the actual time of the audio transmission can be manually
stopped or extended by the receiver. Range is 10 to 255 s.

Audio listen in frame

Audio Listen In Frame Time - 30

Time:

The time in seconds for each audio frame. During transmission the audio is
broken into frames or blocks. Range is 10 to “Audio listen in time” above.

Report mains fault

YES – Report Mains fault?

*-Change 0-Skip

Setting is ignored if “Enable buzzer on mains/line fault” on page 85 is set to Yes.

Yes: By default for Ireland.
No: All other languages (countries) except Ireland.

96 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Report line fault

YES – Report Line fault?

*-Change 0-Skip

Setting is ignored if “Enable buzzer on mains/line fault” on page 85 is set to Yes.

Yes: By default for Ireland.
No: All other languages (countries) except Ireland.

GSM line fault

YES – Enable GSM Line Fault Monitoring

*-Change 0-Skip:

Enables GSM Line Fault Monitoring.

Note: The panel requires a reset in order for the change to take effect.

Select the central station

Central Station 1..4

CS No:

Enter the central station to program.

Select the reporting format

Disabled
Format No:

Every central station can report using a different format. There are following
reporting formats available:

Format Name
1 Tecom Dialler V1 (only used in Australia)
2 DTMF Contact ID – Small
3 DTMF Contact ID – Large
4 SIA – Small
5 SIA – Large
6 X-SIA - Small
7 X-SIA - Large
8 200 Baud FSK - 1
9 200 Baud FSK - 2
10 200 Baud FSK - 3
11 200 Baud FSK - 4
12 X25 ENAI
13 Voice Reporting - Acknowledge
14 Voice Reporting – No Acknowledge

Advisor Master Programming Guide 97

Format Name
15 Secure Stream
16 Reserved
17 Reserved
18 Securitel Serial
19 Securitel PIN

Note: X-SIA – Small and X-SIA – Large are protocol options. The difference
between “Small” and “Large” is the amount of system events it will report. The
large formats will report most system events.
See also “42-Reporting class database” (page 164) and “Reporting” (page 182)

Enter the 1st phone number

*-Pause, Ph No:
Ph1:

Every central station can report to 2 telephone numbers: 1 main and 1 back-up
number. Enter the main number here.
See also “PABX number” (page 94).

Enter the 2nd phone number

*-Pause, Ph No:
Ph2:

Every central station can report to 2 telephone numbers: 1 main and 1 back-up
number. Enter the back-up number here.
See also “PABX number” (page 94).

System account number

System Account - 0000

Acc No:

Account numbers identify alarm systems reporting to central stations. The

system account is used for system events, not linked to an area. Account
numbers are 4 to 6 digits long.
Program 0000 if no system reporting should be made.

Area account numbers

Enter the area 1 account number

*-Next, Area 1 Account - 0000

Acc No:

Program the account code for area 1. Account codes can be 4 to 6 digits long. If
no reporting should be made for this area, program 0000 as account code.

98 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Menu: Select the next area account code to program

Enter the area 2 to 16 account numbers

*-Next, Area 2 Account - 0000

Acc No:

Program the account codes for areas 2 to 16. See “Enter the area 1 account
number” on page 98.

Use BELL modem tones

YES – BELL Modem

*-Change 0-Skip

Specify to use BELL or CCITT modem tones.

Yes: Use BELL modem tones for SIA reporting.
No: Use CCITT modem tones for SIA reporting.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

Dual reporting

NO – Dual Tel Line:Reporting

*-Change 0-Skip

If an acknowledge should be received from both phone numbers, set this option
to Yes.
Yes: Use dual reporting.
No: Use normal reporting.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

Allow audio listen in

NO – Listen In
*-Change 0-Skip

Specify if audio listen in is allowed with this central station

Yes: Audio listen in allowed.
No: No audio listen in allowed.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

Disable reporting of inhibits

NO – Disable Reporting Inhibits

*-Change 0-Skip

Specify if this central station can be used to report inhibits.

Yes: Reporting of inhibits is disabled.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 99

No: Inhibits will be reported.
Press 0 to skip further options and move to central stations.

Reserved

X-SIA max characters

XSIA Max. Characters

*-Change 0-Skip

Specifies the maximum number of characters for XSIA. This option tells the panel
to send either MAX the first 16 or MAX the first 30 characters to the CS.

X25 account code

X25 Account Code

Acc. Code:

This is the account code for X25 protocols. Max: 8 digits.

X25 line type

X25 Line type - 0

Value:

Sets the polling time of the line.

• 0: Permanent 15 minutes polling.
• 1: Permanent 90 seconds polling.

Connection type

0 PSTN CS reports via the on board PSTN dialler

1 ISDN CS reports via the plug-on ATS7100 ISDN dialler
2 ISDN-D CS reports via the plug on ATS7110 ISDN dialler
3 GSM CS reports via the plug on ATS7300 GSM dialler
4 Universal Interface CS reports via the ATS1801 and the plug on ATS1806 IP interface (to
OH Digital Receiver)

Suppress FTC for voice

NO – Suppress FTC for voice reporting

*-Change 0-Skip

Suppresses Report Fail (FTC) messages and Fault LED on the RAS for when
the panel fails to complete voice message delivery only. The “'Voice I/F fail”
message, caused by hardware failure when the panel is unable to communicate
with the ATS7200 board, is not suppressed by this option. The FTC will still be
LOG.

100 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Retry counter

Retry Count: 14
Count:

Enter the maximum number of retries allowed on each Central Station. The
default is 14 retries. The exception is Italy where the default is 2 retries (on
Central Stations set on Voice Reporting).

SIA area modifier

NO – SIA Area modifier

*-Change 0-Skip

Allows the user to send multiple areas O/C using the same account code (as in
CID).
It allows identifying more than one area using only one account code. System
events are reported using the configured system account number (current
behaviour) and an area code 0 (see example below). All area events use area 1
account number.
Examples are:
• Nri02/BA12: New event, Area 2, BA on zone 12.
• Nri11/ZR123: New event, Area 11, ZR on input 123.
• Nri00/RR316: New event, power-up

X25 D-Bit

YES – X25 D-Bit

*-Change 0-Skip

Specifies the X25 D-Bit option ON or OFF for an ISDN-D network configuration.
Yes: D-Bit option for an ISDN-D network is ON.
No: D-Bit option for an ISDN-D network is OFF.
Notes
• Default setting for The Netherlands is ON.
• Default setting for Belgium if OFF.

Mains fail reporting delay [min]

Mains Fail Reporting Delay (Min) - 0

Time:

The panel detects a Mains Fail event when the AC mains supply is absent for
longer than the programmed “Mains fail delay time” on page 66 (in “6-Timers”).
The mains failure event is reported to a programmed central station if “Report
mains fault” on page 96 is set to Yes (“9-Communication options”).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 101

When Mains fail delay time is programmed to zero minutes, the actual control
panel detection time is approximately fifteen seconds.
In order to prevent frequent reporting of mains failure events when Mains fail
delay time is programmed to 0, a timer is employed to delay reporting. If the
mains event restores prior to expiration of the timer, the event shall not be
reported to the central station.

Enable IP line fault monitor

NO – Enable IP Line Fault Monitor

*-Change 0-Skip

Yes: Universal interface ATS1806 will supervise an Ethernet data link.

No: Ethernet connectivity problems detected by the ATS1806 will be ignored.

AWDGP reporting codes for IMQ

NO – AWDGP reporting codes for IMQ

*-Change 0-Skip

When this option is set to Yes, the alternative SIA reporting code will be
transmitted to the Central Station.

102 Advisor Master Programming Guide

10-Program text
The ATS control panel uses a library of pre-programmed words that are used
when programming the names or texts into the system (e.g.: zone names, area
names, etc.). These words form part of the variable text that appears on the LCD
display.
All the words in the library are identified by a reference number, which ranges
from 001 to 899. See Table 9 on page 105 for the list of pre-programmed words
available.
Not all words can be in the library. Therefore an additional 100 words can be
programmed freely. The menu 10-Program text is used to add these new words
to the ATS library. Words are considered any combination of 16 characters. They
can include numbers, spaces (making two words for one reference number), or
punctuation.

Program text words

0900: ARITECH , (*) - Next
Text No:

When programming text, first select the reference number to use (900 to 999). If
words are already programmed, press Menu to go through the list. Select the
number to program.

0900: ARITECH , (*) - End

ARITECH

When the number is selected, the word already programmed is shown and can
be changed. Press Enter to move to the next character.
To change a character, select it by pressing the correct number button (see
Figure 1 on page 104). To accept the character, press Enter. The maximum
length of text is 16 characters.

0900: ARITECH , (*) - End

ARITECH SALES_

Once the text is correct, press Menu to accept the text. It will be shown to
confirm. Press Menu again to accept the text.
To delete a character, select a whitespace character (under [9], see Figure 1 on
page 104).

How to access customised text

Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Menu: Scroll through the list of programmable words 900 to 999.
• Enter: Return to the Programming menu.
• ?, Enter: Enter the reference number of the customised word you want to
change/add.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 103

How to program or modify text
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• ?, Enter: Enter each letter and press Enter to move to the next position.
• Menu: Save and display the word. All characters from the position the cursor
is at and onwards are deleted.
• Menu: Press Menu again to exit the display and return to the first word in the
programmable list.

Figure 1: Keypad layout for entering text.

Key press to get character
Key 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th
1 A B C 1 a b c
2 D E F 2 d e f
3 G H I 3 j k l
4 J K L 4 j k L
5 M N O 5 m n O
6 P Q R 6 p q r
7 S T U 7 s t U
8 V W X 8 v w x
9 Y Z sp* 9 Y Z Sp
0 0 . , ? ! : ;
Key 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
0 - + # * ( ) ‘
Key 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th 20th 21st
0 “ _ @ & $ £ %
Key 22nd 23rd 24th 25th 26th 27th 28th
0 / < > ¿ ¡ § =
Key 29th 30th 31st
0 ¤ ¢ ¥

* Sp: White space or space.

104 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Word library
Table 9: Word library
A 001 Above 008 Area 009 Arming
002 Access 332 Area One 421 Art
003 Accountant 333 Area Two 265 Assistant
264 Accounts 334 Area Three 367 Assistant Manager
417 Accounts Manager 335 Area Four 369 Assistant Manager Day
004 Across 336 Area Five 422 Assistant Principal
404 Admin 337 Area Six 423 Assoc Administrator
418 Administration 338 Area Seven 010 At
272 Air Conditioning 339 Area Eight 011 ATM
005 Alarm 340 Area Nine 308 Atrium
006 All 341 Area Ten 012 Audio
362 All Area User Code 342 Area Eleven 013 Auto
520 All ATMs 343 Area Twelve 350 Auto Arm
419 Amenities 344 Area Thirteen 351 Auto Disarm
295 Analog 345 Area Fourteen 014 Automatic
420 Ancillary Staff 346 Area Fifteen 381 Auto Reset
514 And 347 Area Sixteen 015 Aux
007 APC 410 Armoured Car 424 AV Production
B 016 Back 020 Bay 028 Bottom
349 Baker 021 Beam 326 Box
376 Baker 1 022 Bedroom 539 BRD
377 Baker 2 023 Bell 267 BRG
017 Bar 024 Board 029 Building
018 Basement 025 Boardroom 425 Bulk Store
019 Bathroom 026 Body 030 Business
273 Battery 027 Boiler 031 Button
C 032 Cabinet 045 Charge 055 Compactor
033 Cage 046 Chief 056 Computer
034 Call 047 Cigarettes 429 Computer Room
293 Calibration 048 City 057 Conference
035 Camera 427 Class Room 430 Conference Room
036 Canteen 352 Cleaner 058 Contact
037 Car 411 Cleaner Selling 059 Control
038 Caroline 412 Cleaner Front 299 Corridor
039 Cash 413 Cleaner Admin 358 Count
408 Cash Office 049 Clerk 060 Counter

Advisor Master Programming Guide 105

 040 CCTV 050 Clip 325 Cover
041 Ceiling 051 Cold 432 Covered Area
042 Cellar 052 Combination 061 Covering
043 Central 428 Commerce 522 Curtain
426 Central Bulk Store 053 Commercial 269 Custody
431 Centre 054 Communication 062 Customer
D 274 Dairy 066 Dining 503 Double
433 Dark Room 296 Digital 275 DOTL
304 Data 067 Dispatch 070 Downstairs
063 Delayed 435 District Facility 071 Driveway
266 Desk 068 Dock 072 Drug
064 Detector 069 Door 436 Dry Craft
434 Developmental 465 Doors 074 DUALTEC
065 DGP 543 Door Keypad 073 Duct
330 Dump 075 Duress
E 437 Early 079 Emergency 083 Equipment
076 East 297 Engineering 441 Equipment Store
438 Education 080 End 298 Evaluation
077 Electric 081 Enquiry 084 Exit
078 Electrical 082 Entry 085 Exterior
439 Electronics 440 Entry/Display Area 086 External
F 087 Factory 092 Film 278 Forced Door
442 Factory Manager 093 Fire 096 Foyer
276 Fail 443 Fitness Testing 097 Freezer
088 Failure 094 Floor 098 Front
089 Fashion 323 FLR 379 Front Counter
090 Fence 095 Foil 538 Front Door Keypad
Bank 1
091 File 277 Food 542 Front Door Keypad
Bank 2
G 099 Games 328 Goods 393 Group 19
283 Gaming 448 Graphics 394 Group 20
100 Gas 312 Grd/Flr 395 Group 21
101 Garden 449 Groundsman Store 396 Group 22
102 Garage 106 Ground 397 Group 23
103 Gate 303 Group 398 Group 24
104 General 385 Group 11 399 Group 25
445 General Circulation 386 Group 12 400 Group 26
530 General Staff 387 Group 13 401 Group 27

106 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 519 General Staff 1 388 Group 14 402 Group 28
532 General Staff 2 389 Group 15 403 Group 29
446 GLA 390 Group 16 450 Guard
447 GLA/Stage 391 Group 17 279 Gun
105 Glass 392 Group 18 315 GYM
H 107 Hall 109 Heat 361 Holdup Bar
444 Hallway 364 High Level User 382 Holdup Button
Master
108 Hand 527 High SSO 451 Home Economics
327 Hatch 110 Holdup
I 111 In 112 Input 114 Internal
280 Inertia 452 Instrument Strore 524 Isolate
281 Inner 113 Interior
J 453 Janitor 115 Jewelry 365 Junction
K 355 Key 116 Kick bar 117 Kitchen
302 Keypad 348 Kiosk 384 Kamahira
353 Keyswitch Inhibited
L 118 Landing 121 Level 126 Loading
282 Lay By 122 Library 127 Loans
454 Learning 123 Lift 128 Lobby
119 Left 124 Light 129 Lock
120 Lending 125 Liquor 130 Long Range
375 Loss Prevention 363 Low Level User 528 Low SSO
Master
131 Lounge 132 Lower 133 Lunch
284 Low
M 134 Machine 458 Manual 460 Metal Workshop
455 Machinery Strore 139 Master 143 Microwave
135 Magnetic 044 MASTER ADVISOR 144 Middle
ATS
136 Main 140 Mat 145 Money
456 Main Admin Office 459 Materials Store 146 Motion
457 Main Entry 329 Meat 147 Motor
285 Mains 523 Mechanic 461 Multipurpose Room
318 Makash 141 Medical 462 Music
137 Manager 316 Meeting 463 Music Practice
138 Manchester 142 Mens 464 MYCP & Interview
N 313 ND 151 Night 154 North East
148 Near 370 Night Manager 155 Note

Advisor Master Programming Guide 107

 268 New 354 Noise Makers 156 Number
Isolated
149 Next 152 North
150 Next To 153 North West
O 157 Off 160 On 360 Out
158 Office 161 Open 286 Outer
159 Officer 466 Orchestral 162 Over
P 163 Panel 169 Phone 471 Pre-School
164 Panic 170 PIR 472 Preparation
165 Park 322 360 PIR 473 Principal
467 Passage 287 Pit 311 Print
166 Passive 288 Plant 474 Printery
468 Patrol 470 Playroom 475 Production
531 Patrol 2 357 PNEUMATIC 310 Productivity
533 Patrol 3 171 Point 476 Professional Support
167 Penset 172 Pool 175 Protection
469 Performing Art 356 POPUP 477 Public Waiting
Centre
168 Perimeter 173 Port 176 Pull
321 Personnel 174 Power 177 Pump
Q 478 Quiet Learning
R 178 Rack 186 Record 482 Resource Store
179 Radio 187 Reed Switch 300 Retrofit
180 Raid 479 Reference 306 RF
181 Ramp 188 Refrigeration 191 Right
317 RAS 307 Register 309 Riser
182 Reader 189 Remote 192 Road
183 Rear 190 Representative 193 Roller Door
184 Receiving 480 Reprographic 194 Roof
Production
407 Receving Dock 518 Request To Exit 195 Room
378 Receiving Door 294 Research 263 RSB
185 Reception 481 Resource Centre 196 Rumpus
S 197 Safe 490 Small Group 222 Stairway
305 Sales 212 Smoke 223 Station
270 Savings 213 Sound 224 Stereo
483 School 214 South 290 Stop
484 Science 215 South East 371 Stock Hand
198 Screen 216 South West 372 Stock Hand 1
199 Secretary 217 Spare 373 Stock Hand 2

108 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 324 Security 491 Special 374 Stock Hand 3
207 Seismic 414 Special Access 1 406 Stock Room
200 Selling 415 Special Access 2 225 Store
529 Senior Staff 416 Special Access 3 366 Store Manager
535 Senior Staff Second 492 Special Education 368 Store Manager Day
Tz Area
537 Senior Staff Third Tz 493 Sports Store 331 Store Room
201 Sensor 494 Spray 226 Storage
485 Servery 218 Sprinkler 227 Strobe
202 Service 219 SRT 359 Strong room
405 Service Bay 544 SSO 228 Strike
486 Service Manager 314 ST 498 Student Centre
487 Services Room 220 Staff 499 Student Waiting
203 Shop 495 Staff & Amenities 500 Studies
204 Short Tom 525 Staff Areas 1 to 4 501 Studio
205 Show 526 Staff Areas 5 to 8 319 Substation
206 Side 380 Staff Door 291 Sump
208 Sign 521 Staff Window 229 Supermarket
Bypass
488 Single 409 Staff Entry 230 Supervisor
209 Siren 496 Staff Lounge 231 Surveillance
210 Shutter 497 Staff Room 232 Switch
211 Sliding 534 Staff Second Tz 292 Switchboard
289 Small 536 Staff Third Tz 233 System
489 Small Equip Store 221 Stair
T 234 Tamper 236 Teller 240 Toilet
235 Tape 507 Temp GLA 241 Tool
504 Teacher 508 Temp Typing 242 Top
505 Teacher Work 237 Temperature 271 Trading
502 Tea Room 509 Textile Store 510 Trades
301 Technical 044 The Challenger 243 Transmitter
506 Technician 238 Time 244 Trap
320 Telecom 239 To 511 Typing GLA
U 245 Ultrasonic 513 Unit 247 Upstairs
512 Under 246 Upper
V 248 Valve 541 Vault RAS Bank 2 252 Video
249 Vault 250 Vent 253 Voltage
540 Vault RAS Bank 1 251 Ventilator 383 Volumetric
W 254 Wall 257 Window 517 Work Room

Advisor Master Programming Guide 109

 255 Warehouse 258 Wired Grid 260 Workshop
256 West 259 Womens
515 Wet Craft 516 Wood Workshop
Y 261 Yard
Z 262 Zone

110 Advisor Master Programming Guide

11-Version
Displays the version information for the control panel, the RASs and DGPs.

Select device
Version 1 - ATS CP 2 - RAS 3 - DGP
0-Exit, Menu:

Each device shows different information.

Option Device Information

1 — ATS CP Control panel Copyright information
ATS Panel Type
Eprom version
Options available
Build date
Language
CPLD Version
Markets Supported
Press multiple Enter to view all information
2 — RAS Arming stations Type of arming station and version info
3 — DGP DGPs Type of DGP and version info

Notes
• ATS Panel Type — it can identify a 2000, 3000, 4000 or 4500 series panel
type.
• Markets Supported — up to 30 characters can be displayed here.
E.g. ABC_XY_AA_F_AN_AQ_E_D.
• When calling the technical support, this information might be asked to be able
to provide answers to questions.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 111

12-LED test
LED Test is Off
Code:

This function is used to test all LEDs in the system. This includes LEDs on
arming stations, card readers, etc.
You can turn all the LEDs on by entering a valid code, exit the Programming
menu, check the LEDs on all Arming Stations, then return to the menu to turn the
LEDs off by entering a valid code again.

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Code, Enter: Enter a valid user code and press Enter to turn on/off all the
LEDs in the system.
• Enter: Return to the Programming menu.
Note: Do not forget to turn off the LEDs again.

112 Advisor Master Programming Guide

13-Timezones
Timezones are used to create timeslots in which certain events can take place.
Timezones are for example used to automatically arm areas, disable users or to
activate outputs to open a door.
Timezones are assigned to alarm groups, door groups, floor groups,
relays/outputs, arm/disarm timers, and Out of Hours Access reporting to
restrict/enable some ATS operations during specific time periods.
There are two main types of timezone. However, both have the same function.
Timezones programmed for specific timeperiods - as detailed in this menu option
(numbers 0 to 24). Also called hard timezones.
Timezones programmed to be valid when a relay is active (numbers 26-41). See
Programming menu option “22-Timezone to follow output” on page 137. Also
called soft timezones.
Note: Timezone 0 (zero) is a 24-hour timezone (always valid) and is not
programmable.
Timezone 25 is a special soft timezone that is valid as long as the "Service Tech"
is enabled, and can be used to control functions required during that period. For
further information see “Service time available” on page 64 in “6-Timers”, and
"Enable/Disable Service Tech" in Advisor Master Manager Manual.
Timezones are numbered 1 to 24.
Each timezone is made up of four sub-timezones, each containing a different
start and end time, the weekdays the sub-timezone is valid on and an option to
make a sub-timezone valid on holidays.
Where the start time for a timezone is on a different day to the end time,
consecutive sub-timezones have to be used.
A time of 24:00 or 00:00 is not recognised as an end time and can therefore be
used to extend a valid period to the next sub-timezone.
The timezone becomes valid beginning at the start time on any day listed in the
same sub-timezone.
The timezone becomes invalid (stops) at the end time on any day listed in the
same sub-timezone.
A timezone is invalid on any holiday that has been declared in the holiday date
file (User menu 21) unless HOL is included as a day in the sub timezone. If HOL
is included, the timezone is valid on any holiday (even if the day of the week that
it falls on is not included in the sub-zone).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 113

Select timezone
Timezones
Timezone No:

First select the timezone to program (1 to 24).

How to program timezones

Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Menu: Skip this timezone.
• ?, Enter: Enter a new value.
• Enter: Save the time values displayed and move to the days display.
Note: If you only want to change one of the time values (e.g. change end time
from 17:30 to 18:30), you must re-enter each time value.

Timezone settings
Program start time, hours

Tz 1.1 Start–08:00 End–00:00

Start Hours:

First program the hour for starting time for the timezone, sub-timezone 1.

Program start time, minutes

Tz 1.1 Start – 08:00 End – 00:00

Start Mins:

Enter the minutes for the starting time for the timezone, sub-timezone 1.

Program end time, hours

Tz 1.1 Start–08:00 End–00:00

End Hours:

Program the hours for this sub-timezone to end the valid period.

Program end time, minutes

Tz 1.1 Start–08:00 End–00:00

End Mins:

Finally, program the minutes for this timezone to end the valid period.

114 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Days

Tz 1.1 Days: --,Mo,Tu,We,--,--,--,Hol

(1)Sun-(8)Hol:

Once you have entered the valid time period for the sub-timezone, the next
display that appears lets you enter the days of the week and holidays on which
the timezone is valid.
For the days of the week, enter their numerical value, where Sunday is “1” and
holiday is “8”.
Note: The next displays contain sub-timezones 1.2 to 1.4. These are
programmed in the same way as sub-timezone 1.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 115

14-Defaults
Sometimes it is necessary to bring the control panel back to factory defaults. For
example when a system is going to be programmed for the first time or when
programming a system that has been de-powered for an extended period (more
then 2 weeks).

Select default option

99-All, 98-STD, 97-Output/Groups, 95
Software IUM
Option:

Select the programmed options to bring back to factory default.

99-All Resets all the system records to the factory default. All
programming is erased.
98-STD (standard) Resets some of the programming menus. The following menus
are defaulted:
• Area database
• Alarm groups (11-29)
• Timers
• System options
• Auto reset
• Timezones
• Alarm group restrictions
• Auto Arm/disarm
• Areas assigned to vaults
• Area linking
• Timezone to follow output
97-Outputs and groups Resets the event to output records, the door and floor groups.
95-Software IUM This new option upgraded the panel to Software IUM. By using
this option the different memories will be converted as listed in
Table 10 below.
93-Grade 3 Set default values for EN 50131 Grade 3 compliance.
See “Options required by EN 50131 compliance” on page 200 for
more information.
Note: There is a prompt to apply these settings after the first
installer login. See “First startup” on page 6 for more details.

Table 10: Software IUM conversion

Value No memory 1MB
Number of standard users 50 11000
Number of IUM users 0 0

116 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Value No memory 1MB
Soft IUM
Number of standard users 50 11000
Number of IUM users 50 2232

Users against memory size and type

There are two types of memory configurations: Standard Memory and Intelligent
User Memory configuration. Refer to the table below.

No. of cards No. of PINs No. of users

No memory / Soft IUM 50 50 50
1Mb Standard Memory 11000 1000 11000
1Mb Soft IUM 2000 2000 2000
4Mb IUM 17,872 17,872 17,872
8Mb IUM 65,532 65,532 65,532

Advisor Master Programming Guide 117

15-Alarm group restrictions
Alarm group restrictions provide means to define certain alarm control functions
for certain areas in alarm groups. Alarm control can be restricted to “Timed
disarm” and “Arm/Reset only”.
Two special restrictions are available:
• Alarm group restriction Emergency
• Alarm group restriction Counter
The combination of alarm group and alarm group restriction provides the
available alarm control to a user (or keyswitch). An alarm group is only restricted
if a restriction is programmed. The restriction is only applicable if the areas from
the alarm group restriction are also in the alarm group. Areas that are not in the
alarm group restriction but are available in the alarm group, do not have any
restriction (except if programmed in the “5-Alarm groups” on page 50).
Examples:
• Cleaners are only allowed to arm/reset area 1, 2, and 3. They are not allowed
to disarm. Area 4 however, they can arm and disarm without restrictions.
An alarm group is programmed with areas 1 through 4 and alarm group
restriction 1. Alarm group restriction 1 has arm/reset only for areas 1, 2,
and 3.
• A security guard has permission to disarm areas 3, 4, and 5. After 15
minutes, the areas should re-arm automatically.
An alarm group is programmed with areas 3, 4, and 5 and alarm group
restriction 3. Alarm group restriction 3 has areas 3, 4, and 5 for timed disarm.
In Timers, the disarmed time is programmed for 15 minutes.

Alarm group restriction options

1. Timed disarm of areas
The Timed Disarm option applies to areas assigned to an alarm group and
programmed as “Timed disarm areas” on page 120 in the Alarm group restriction
menu.

Alarm group restrictions 1 to 6: The areas arm again when the timer has expired unless other
timers are still running.
When disarming the programmed
areas and a timer starts running. Users can arm the area by re-entering their code, provided
the display does not show Ending. If other timers are running
and the code is re-entered, the individual alarm group
restriction is cleared but the area is not armed.
Users can extend the timer by re-entering their code when the
display shows Ending for their alarm group restriction.
A buzzer sounds as a warning when the timer is running out
and the area is about to arm.

118 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Alarm group restriction 7 – As alarm group restriction 1 to 6, except that when the timer
Emergency: expires and the areas re-arm, an “Emergency” message is
reported to the central station.
Special function for Security
Guards on a guard tour who
need to check in at certain
intervals.
Alarm group restriction 8 - When the users enter their code to re-arm, the user count for
Counter: each area decreases by one.
Special Function: User count for The display always shows the user count.
each area
The area can be armed by the users by re-entering their code
to arm, provided the user count for each of the areas to be
armed, is down to 1 before the code is entered. I.e. the next
code reduces the count to 0 and arm the area(s).
Timers do not operate for alarm group restriction 8.
Can count a maximum of 255 users per area.

2. Arm/reset of areas
Only arm/reset functions apply to areas assigned to an alarm group and
programmed as “Areas to arm/reset” on page 120 in Alarm group restriction
menu. When a user enters a code, it arms the programmed areas, regardless of
any timers running (but cannot disarm), or it resets alarms in the programmed
areas.

3. Timed disarm and arm/reset

Both timed disarm and arm/reset functions apply to areas assigned to an alarm
group and programmed both as “Timed disarm areas” on page 120 and “Areas to
arm/reset” on page 120.
When a user enters a code, all the timed disarm functions apply except when re-
entering a code the arm/reset function applies and the system is armed
regardless of any timers running.

4. No alarm group restriction assigned

Areas assigned to an alarm group, but not included in the alarm group restriction
menu, have standard alarm system control functions as specified in the alarm
group. E.g. code, On/Off to arm/disarm etc.
Notes
• Program the length of time that the timer runs for in “6-Timers” (page 62), or
“2-Area database” (page 29). If the timer is set to zero, the alarm group
restriction does not time out. The alarm group restriction functions in exactly
the same way except a timer does not run and therefore does not arm areas
on expiry.
• Program the warning time that appears on the display and sounds an audible
alert in “6-Timers” (page 62).
• Assign the alarm group restriction to alarm groups in the menu “5-Alarm
groups” (page 50).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 119

• Users cannot operate alarm group restrictions unless the arming station they
are using has the same alarm group restrictions in its alarm group.

Restriction number
Alarm Group Restrictions
Restr. No:

First select the Alarm group restriction to be programmed (numbered from 1

to 8).

Configuring alarm restriction

Alarm group restriction name

Restriction Name: 0352, Cleaner

Text No:

Select the name of an alarm group restriction from the list of words already held
by the ATS system. These words can be from the standard word library (see
Table 9 on page 105) or from a list of words that you have programmed yourself
(programming menu option “10-Program text” on page 103).
Program the alarm group restriction name, using the reference number of the
word. The name should be easily recognisable.

Timed disarm areas

1,2,3,6,7,
1, Timed Area:

When a user enters a code, the programmed areas are disarmed and a timer
starts running. In order for the function to be enabled, the areas listed in this
option must also be listed in the alarm group to which the alarm group restriction
is assigned and alarm system control has to be enabled.
See also “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.

Areas to arm/reset

1,2,3,4,5,
1, A/R Area:

When a user enters a code, the programmed areas are armed or alarms are
reset. In order for the function to be enabled, the areas listed in this option must
also be listed in the alarm group to which the alarm group restriction is assigned
and alarm system control has to be enabled.
See also “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.

120 Advisor Master Programming Guide

1st alternate timed disarm area

9,10,
2, Timed Area:

As explained in “5-Alarm groups” on page 50, it is possible to have alternate

alarm groups. The alternate alarm group is used when the original alarm group is
not available due to an invalid timezone.
When an alternate alarm group is active and the alternate alarm group has an
alarm group restriction, the alternate alarm group restriction is used.

For example
Three alarm groups have been set up:

Option ALARM GROUP

32 33 34
Area 1, 2 1, 2 1
Alarm group restriction 4 4 4
Timezone 1 2 0
Alternate alarm group 33 34 1 ( = none)

Alarm group restriction 4 is programmed:

Option Standard 1st alternate 2nd alternate

Timed disarm Area - 2 1
Arm/Reset Area 2 - -

Alarm group 31 is assigned to user 1. Alarm group 32 is assigned to user 2.

Operation:
• Timezone 1 is valid. User 1 will have alarm group 31 with alarm group
restriction 4, standard. Has full control over area 1 and can arm and reset
area 2. Timezone 1 does not effect alarm group 32 (= user 2).
• Timezone 1 is invalid but timezone 2 is valid. User 1 will have the 1st
alternate alarm group (32) and alarm group restriction 4, also 1st alternate.
Has full control over area 1. Has timed disarm for area 2.
User 2 will have alarm group 32 and alarm group restriction 4, standard. Has
full control over area 1, and can arm and reset area 2.
• Timezone 1 and 2 are invalid. User 1 will have the 2nd alternate alarm group
(33) and alarm group restriction 4, also 2nd alternate. Has timed disarm for
area 1, and no control over area 2.
User 2 will have the 1st alternate alarm group (33) and alarm group restriction
4, also 1st alternate. Has full control over area 1, and no control over area 2.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 121

 User 1

Alarm group 31
Areas: 1, 2 
AG restriction: 4
Timezone: 1 Alarm group restriction 4
Alternate AG: 32
Use standard

restriction
1, Timed Area:
Timezone 1 invalid 1, A/R Area: 2
 
Alarm group 32
Areas: 1, 2 Use 1st alternate 2, Timed Area: 2
 
AG restriction: 4 restriction 2, A/R Area:
Timezone: 2
Alternate AG: 33
 
Timezones 1 and 2 invalid 3, Timed Area: 1
3, A/R Area:
Use 2nd alternate

restriction
Alarm group 33
Areas: 1 
AG restriction: 4
Timezone: 0 (always)
Alternate AG: 1 (none)

User 2

Alarm group 32
Areas: 1, 2 
AG restriction: 4
Timezone: 1 Alarm group restriction 4
Alternate AG: 33
Use standard

restriction
1, Timed Area:
Timezone 2 invalid 1, A/R Area: 2
 
Alarm group 33
Areas: 1, 2 Use 1st alternate 2, Timed Area: 2
 
AG restriction: 4 restriction 2, A/R Area:
Timezone: 0 (always)
Alternate AG: 1 (none)

3, Timed Area: 1
3, A/R Area:

122 Advisor Master Programming Guide

See also “5-Alarm groups” on page 50 and “Timed disarm areas” on page 120.

1st alternate areas to arm/reset

9,10,
2, A/R Area:

See “Areas to arm/reset”, “1st alternate timed disarm area” and “5-Alarm groups”
(on page 50).

2nd alternate timed disarm area

12,
3, Timed Area:

See “1st alternate timed disarm area”.

2nd alternate areas to arm/reset

12,
3, A/R Area:

See “1st alternate areas to arm/reset”.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 123

16-Event to output
Programming section to link events to outputs. Outputs are available as relay
cards (ATS1810, ATS1811) or open collector outputs (ATS1820).
Before an event flag actually will activate an output, a number of conditions have
to be met:
• The timezone has to be valid (if programmed).
• The output logic defines how the output behaves when the timezone is valid.
• The output behaviour can be set to normal or inverted.
Only for a correct combination of conditions, the output will activate. See figure 2
for an overview.

Figure 2: Basic functionality for outputs

 Invalid
Event flag  
Output
  Valid  Output logic  normal /  Physical output
inverted

Timezone

Output number
Event To Ouput
Output No:

This is the physical number of the output. Each output has a specific number that
will identify the output to the control panel. The output number is determined by
the address of the device the relay card is connected to.
See Advisor Master Installation Guide for more information on output numbers on
devices.

Configuring event to output

Event flag number

Output 3 Mapped To Event Flag 123

Event Flag:

An event flag or a timezone activates an output. Enter the event flag number
here.
The output follows the event flags during a valid timezone. If event number 0 is
programmed, the output does not follow any event flag.

124 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Defaults
The only events activating an output by default are:
• Output 2 (strobe output) is linked to event flag 2.
• Output 16 (panel siren output) is linked to event flag 1.
• Output 15 (internal siren output) is linked to event flag 13.
• Output 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208 224, 240 (DGP
siren outputs) are linked to event flag 1.
For more information on event flags, see “Event Flags” on page 179.

Timezone to control output

Output 3 Timezone 12
Timezone No:

The timezone entered controls the times that an output is active or inactive. If a
timezone is programmed, it sets the output when the time is valid. The status of
the event flag is irrelevant when the timezone is valid. If the timezone is invalid,
the output follows the event flag. If no timezone is programmed the output follows
only the event flag.
See also “13-Timezones” on page 113.

Active or inactive during timezone

Output 3 Inactive During Timezone

*-Change

Determine the effect if the timezone is valid.

Active: If set to Activate during timezone, the output activates when the timezone
is valid regardless of the status of the event flag and provided the output is not
inverted.
Inactive: If set to Inactive during timezone, the output does not activate when the
timezone is valid regardless of the status of the event flag and provided the
output is not inverted. If the timezone is invalid, the output follows the event flag.

Invert output

Output 3 is NON-Inverted
*-Change

Inverted: If the output is inverted, the logic controlling the output is reversed. E.g.
if the previous logic determines that the output is to be ON, this setting would
change it to OFF.
Non-inverted: The output follows the event flag. If the event flag is active, the
output is ON.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 125

17-Auto arm/disarm
To automatically arm and/or disarm areas, timezones are used. Areas being
armed or disarmed automatically do not require any user action.
Note: If the “Prevent arming on faults” option described on page 89 is set to Yes,
particular faults may prevent auto arming. To avoid this, make sure that the
selected alarm group in “Alarm group to auto arm/disarm” below allows forced
arming. See also “Using alarm group restrictions in conjunction with auto
arm/disarm” on page 127.

Auto arm/disarm program

Auto Arm/Disarm
Program No:

Enter the program number (1 to16 available).

Configuring auto arm/disarm

Timezone to arm/disarm

Pgm: 1 TimeZone 2
Timezone No:

Enter the timezone to be used for automatic arming/disarming. When the

timezone becomes valid (at the start time) the area disarms. When the specific
timezone expires (at the end time) the areas arm.
See also “13-Timezones” on page 113.

Alarm group to auto arm/disarm

Pgm: 1 Alm-Grp: 14-Area One

Alm-Grp:

The alarm group is used to determine which areas are automatically armed or
disarmed, and if the specified areas are to be automatically armed, disarmed or
both.
If an alarm group restriction is linked to the alarm group, the automatic arming
can be postponed by a preset time (alarm group restriction disarmed time, see
“6-Timers” on page 62).
Notes
• The settings in the alarm group determine the exact operation of this function.
The function follows all the guidelines of the alarm group regarding alarm
control. For example, if the alarm group setting for Arm and Reset only is set
to Yes, then the areas assigned will only automatically arm.

126 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 If the alarm group setting for disarm only is set to Yes, then the assigned
areas will only automatically disarm. See “5-Alarm groups” on page 50 for
further information.
If the alarm group setting for any alarm group restriction is set to Yes, then a
user can extend the time that the area(s) are disarmed for a specified period.
See “Using alarm group restrictions in conjunction with auto arm/disarm”
below for further information.
• Each combination of a timezone and an alarm group is called a program.
There are 16 programs, one for each possible area. A different program must
be completed for each area, or set of areas, where you require different
functions. E.g. disarm at different times.
• When programming alarm groups, a timezone can be assigned to the alarm
group to specify when the alarm group is valid. The alarm group assigned to
an arm/disarm timer program does not require a timezone in the alarm group.
If both the alarm group and the auto arm/disarm have a timezone, check that
the timezone in the alarm group does not conflict with the timezone for
automatic arm/disarm.

Using alarm group restrictions in conjunction with auto

arm/disarm
Users can postpone the time that the area(s) will arm by entering their code (or
presenting their card) during the "Warning Time”. Link an alarm group restriction
to the alarm group for the area(s) to postpone by setting “Timed disarm areas” on
page 120.
Program the following items to achieve this function:
• An alarm group restriction must be programmed with the areas required to
timed disarm (the area(s) must also be included in any alarm groups that the
alarm group restriction is assigned to - see below).
• The same Alarm group restriction (as programmed above) must be set to Yes
in:
- The alarm group used in the arm/disarm timer program.
- The alarm group assigned to the arming station(s) or door reader(s) at which
the user is required to perform the function.
- The alarm group assigned to the user(s) who will perform the function.
• The required times must be programmed in “6-Timers” on page 62:
- “AG restriction 1 disarmed time” on page 62. The time the automatic arming
will be postponed.
- “Warning time” on page 63. The time that the warning sounds (on the
keypad buzzer) before the area(s) automatically arm. The code/card must be
presented during the warning period to postpone the automatic arming.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 127

• If a separate warning beeper needs to be activated from an output, link the
output to the “Warning timer event flag” on page 32 that is programmed in the
“2-Area database” for the areas specified in the alarm group restriction.
• Ensure that the alarm group restrictions are also assigned to the alarm group
for the user's and arming stations.
For further information, see:
• “5-Alarm groups” (page 50),
• “6-Timers” (page 62),
• “15-Alarm group restrictions” (page 118),
• User menu 14, Program users.

128 Advisor Master Programming Guide

18-Vaults
Vault areas are areas that will automatically arm other areas after a preset time
once they are armed. A user that has the vault areas in his alarm group arms the
vault areas. The time starts only if all vault areas are armed. The user does not
need to have alarm control over the areas that are automatically armed.

2, 3, 4,
Area:

By using a special programming procedure, an alarm group restriction timer

starts when all the vault areas are armed. When the timer expires, a non-vault
area linked to the vault areas will automatically arm.
For example: A building has three office areas (areas 3, 4, and 5), a common
foyer (area 1) and a common canteen (area 2). Assigning the office areas as
vaults allows the foyer and the canteen to be armed at a set time after the last
office is armed.
Other programming to be done:
• Areas (3, 4, and 5) must be assigned to vaults on this option.
• Set “Disable insert of AG restriction” on page 75 to No.
• The areas to be timed on (1 and 2) must be linked to the areas designated as
vaults in “19-Area linking” on page 130 (areas 1 and 2 linked to areas 3, 4,
and 5).
• The linked areas not assigned as vaults (area 1 and 2) must be included in an
alarm group restriction to “Timed disarm areas” on page 120.
• The delay time required for the areas to on arms is programmed in “6-Timers”
(page 62) as alarm group restriction disarmed time. Use the same alarm
group restriction as above.
• The alarm group restriction is then inserted into the necessary alarm groups
(Assigned to users/RASs) to enable the function to be used. The alarm group
must include the areas assigned to the alarm group restriction if the
restrictions are to operate.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 129

19-Area linking
In an object with multiple areas, the entrance to the object in most cases is
shared by all areas. This shared area should only be armed when the last area is
armed. The shared area is a common area.
The simplest way to have a common entrance is by assigned multiple areas to a
zone. This zone will only generate an alarm if all assigned areas are armed. The
longest exit and entry time will be used.
The other way to create common areas is by using a dedicated area. By linking
the other areas to this area, the area will arm automatically when the last (linked)
area is armed. As soon as the first area disarms, the common area will also
disarm.
Using linked areas, the common area can also be disarmed on its own. It has a
separate entry and exit time. Reporting is selectable. It can have separate event
flags.
For example:
• Area 1 is a foyer.
• Area 1 is linked to areas 2, 3, 4.
• When any of areas 2, 3 or 4 is disarmed, area 1 will be disarmed.
• When all of areas 2, 3 and 4 are armed, area 1 will be armed.
Linked areas also have alarm control over the common area (if programmed in
the alarm group).
For example:
• Area 1 is linked to areas 2, 3, 4.
• A user with area 3 can therefore reset an alarm in area 1.

Linking areas
Linking areas is done by first selecting the common area.

Area Linking
Common area:

Next select the areas to be linked to the common area. Remove linked areas by
entering these again.

Area 1: 2, 3, 4
Area to Link:

130 Advisor Master Programming Guide

20-System codes
The ATS control panels support up to two different system codes (sometimes
also referred to as "Site codes" or "Facility codes") for use with ATS1170 one-
door RAS. Each system code also provides an option to offset the card ID for
easier programming. The system code is a unique code provided by the supplier.
Note: The ATS1250/1260 four-door/four-lift DGP does not require this setting to
be programmed in the control panel. Using the menu “28-To remote devices” on
page 141 it is programmed in the DGP. Also see the programming guide of the
ATS1250/1260.

System code settings

System code 1

System Code 1: 004346

SysCode:

Enter the first system code here. The system code is provided by the supplier
and is unique to the reader device and card range
The system code normally has 6 digits. If less then 6 digits are provided, add
leading zeroes.

Card offset 1

Card Offset 1: + 0
*-Chg, No:

Specify the number to be added or subtracted from the actual card ID number,
for cards in System Code A. The ATS control panel will calculate the user
number from:
User Number = CARD ID + (or −) card offset
The calculated user number is used for programming the user and when
reporting events to the central station or the computer.
For example: The card offset is programmed as −5000. The actual physical card
ID number is 5001. The card will be programmed as User 1, and will report as
User 1.

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Menu: Change the offset to + (add) or − (subtract).
• ?, Enter: Enter the card offset required.
• Enter: Save the displayed setting and move to the next display.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 131

System code 2

System Code 2: 005678

SysCode:

Specify the second system code, if required. See “System code 1” on page 131
for further information.

Card offset 2

Card Offset 2: + 0
*-Chg, No:

Specify the card offset for cards in system code B. See “Card offset 1” on page
131 for further information.

132 Advisor Master Programming Guide

21-Zone shunts
A shunt procedure inhibits a zone from generating an alarm during a certain time
period when active. A zone shunt starts on an output being activated, on most
occasions a door unlocking. During the shunt time the zone is inhibited. If the
zone is still active after the shunt time has expired, the zone will generate an
alarm, depending on the zone type and the status of the area.
A shunt timer (16 available) that can be programmed individually controls each
zone shunt. Before the shunt timer expires, a warning can be given.

Shunt timer number

Shunt Timers
Shunt No:

Specify the shunt timer to program (16 shunt timers available).

Note: Where a keypad is used to start the timer, the shunt timer number must be
the same as the arming station number (1 to 16, set by dipswitches in the arming
station).

Shunt options
Zone number to shunt

Shunt 1: Shunts Zone 200

Zone No:

Determine the zone that is to be shunted. The zone can only be assigned to one
shunt timer.
The display shows the current zone number that relates to this shunt timer.

Output number to start shunt

Shunt 1: Shunts Zone by Output 2

Output No:

Select the output to start the shunt timer. The display shows the assigned output.
The output condition controls whether or not the zone remains shunted. If the
output is active, the zone is always shunted. When the output de-activates, the
shunt timer continues to run for the programmed shunt time.
Note: The total shunt time is the time the output activates + the shunt time.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 133

Shunt time

Shunt 1: Time Is Set For (Sec) 30

Shunt Time:

Program the amount of time that the zone will be shunted. If the time expires and
the zone remains active, an alarm condition occurs, depending on the zone type
and the status of the area.
If the value entered is less than 128, the time is in seconds. I.e. 1 to
127 seconds.
To set the time in minutes the value entered is 128 plus the time required in
minutes.
E.g. for 30 minutes enter 158. (128 + 30 = 158).
The value 128 is invalid and cannot be used. For accurate timing of 1 or 2 minute
periods, set the time in seconds. i.e. 60 or 120 seconds.
Note: Do not use a time of 0 seconds, unless for doors when “Cancel door event
flag” on page 135 is set to Yes. The zone could otherwise be shunted indefinitely.

Shunt warning time

Shunt Warning Is 0
Warn Time:

Program the time the shunt warning event flag will be activated before the shunt
timer expires. If the shunt time is programmed in seconds, the warning time is
also in seconds. If the shunt time is in minutes, then the warning time is also in
minutes.

Shunt event flag

Shunt Event Flag is 4

Event Flag:

The event flag assigned is activated when the shunt timer is running.

Shunt warning event flag

Shunt Warning Event Flag is 12

Event Flag:

The event flag assigned is activated when the shunt warning time is active.

Door open command starts shunt

NO – Door Open Command Start Shunt

*-Change 0-Skip

Determine when the shunt timer is activated.

Yes: A keypad or shunt output is required to start the shunt timer. If a keypad is
used, the user must have a valid door group assigned.

134 Advisor Master Programming Guide

No: The condition of the zone, normal to active, triggers the timer.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.
Notes
• If this option is set to Yes and the keypad or shunt relay starts the shunt timer,
the timer resets if the zone does not switch to normal state within:
- 3 seconds if the shunt time is programmed for 1 to 127 s.
- 3 minutes if the shunt timer is programmed for 1 to 127 min.
• If this option is set to Yes, “Entry/exit shunting” on page 136 must be set to
No.

Shunt zone when disarmed

NO – Shunt Zone When Disarmed

*-Change 0-Skip

Specify if the zone will be shunted when one or more of the areas assigned to
the shunted zone are disarmed.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.
Note: Set either “Shunt zone when disarmed” or “Shunt zone when armed” to
Yes. Otherwise the shunt procedure will not operate.

Shunt zone when armed

NO – Shunt Zone When Armed

*-Change 0-Skip

It records whether the door shunt procedure operates when all the areas
assigned to the shunted zone are secure.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.
Note: Set either “Shunt zone when disarmed” or “Shunt zone when armed” to
Yes. Otherwise the shunt procedure will not operate.

Cancel door event flag

NO – Cancel Door Event Flag

*-Change 0-Skip

Define that closing the zone cancels the shunt time.

Yes: As soon as the shunted zone switches to normal state, the door unlock
event and the shunt timer are cancelled.
No: The door unlock event and the shunt timer are not cancelled if the zone
switches to normal state.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 135

Zone holds event flag for 2 seconds

NO – Zone Holds Event Flag for 2 Sec.

*-Change 0-Skip

Delay cancelling of the door event flag. It is used for doors with magnetic locks
and drop bolts.
Yes: In order to allow time for a door to be properly closed, there is a 2-second
delay after the zone switches to normal and before it cancels the door event and
shunt timer.
No: There is no delay.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.

Entry/exit shunting

NO – Entry/Exit Shunting
*-Change 0-Skip

Allows the shunted zone to be treated as an entry/exit zone.

Yes: A code must be entered to start the shunting or before the shunt timer
expires, otherwise an alarm is generated.
No: The shunted zone is not treated an entry/exit zone.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.
Note: If this option is set to Yes, the “Door open command starts shunt” on page
134 must be set to No.

Log door open/close

NO – Log Door Open/Close

*-Change 0-Skip

Allow for the zone to be logged on printer as door open/close when it switches
between normal and active.
Yes: Every time the zone changes status, it is logged to the printer.
No: No reporting to the printer.
Press 0 to end programming this shunt timer and to select a new shunt timer.
Note: If “Print zone when active” on page 26 is set to Yes for the zone assigned
to the shunt timer, a door open message is sent twice.

136 Advisor Master Programming Guide

22-Timezone to follow output
Select a timezone to follow an output. When the output is active, the timezone is
valid. Use this option to invalidate alarm groups if certain conditions are not met.
For example:
• Prohibit the use of a keypad, unless a keyswitch on a zone is active.
• Allow an area to be disarmed only if another area is disarmed before.
The timezones that follow outputs are also referred to as soft timezones. Hard
timezones are valid between a start and end-time.

Select timezone
Output To Timezone
Tz (26-41)

Select the timezone to follow the output (timezones 26 to 41 are available).

Assign output to follow

Tz 27 To Follow Output 3
Output No:

Assign the output the timezone has to follow.

Notes
• When programming door groups, timezones 26 to 41 can only be used with
doors 1 to 16.
Doors 17 to 64 are only available on 4-Door DGPs that only recognise
timezones 0 to 24.
Timezones 26 to 41 can never be used in door or floor groups.
• If the output is inverted, timezones 26 to 41 are valid if the output is not active
(the event flag is not triggered).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 137

23-Poll errors
Use this menu to get an indication on how many errors have been detected in
communications between the ATS control panel and devices connected to it.

Select device type

1-RAS, 2-DGP, 3-Clear All Counters
0-Exit, Menu:

Select the type of devices to view the number of poll errors on. Optionally the
error counters can be reset. The available options are:
• 1 - RAS: View poll errors for remote arming stations
• 2 - DGP: View poll errors for DGP’s or the dialler
• 3 - Reset: Reset all poll error counters.
After selecting the device type, a list of all devices is shown. Select a particular
device by entering its device number. The device numbers are as follows:
• RAS 1 to 16: Arming stations 1 to 16
• DGP 0: Panel communications to central station
• DGP 1 to 15: Data gathering panels 1 to 15

RAS 1, Poll Error Count Is 0

0-Exit, RAS No:

How to read poll errors for devices

Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• ?, Enter: Select the device to view the poll errors.
• Enter: Leave the list and return to the device type selection.
Note: Set the error count for all units to zero when the system is error free after
installation. If you do not do this, errors that occurred during installation could
distort any error count. The maximum error count that can be recorded is 255.

138 Advisor Master Programming Guide

24-Download to remote device
Download data to remote devices like the ATS1250/1260. The data to download
concerns access control functions for the four-door/four-lift DGP’s.
While the four-door/four-lift DGP’s are programmed to be polled and are online,
any programming done regarding these DGP’s will be automatically downloaded.
However, if a four-door/four-lift DGP is added to the system at a later date or has
had to be defaulted or replaced, any relevant user, door/floor group, timezone
and holiday data can be downloaded using this Programming menu.
All of these settings are stored in databases in the control panel and the DGP.
This way, the four-door/four-lift DGP can operate stand-alone in case of
problems communicating to the control panel.

Select download option

1-Display Status 2-Download
Option:

Two menus are available. The first menu displays the download status. The
second menu is used to select the item to download.

Add Door Group 0012 - 0128

Que = 0005

Display download status

Indicate the status of the download. The display shows:
• The database items being downloaded
• The total number of records to be downloaded for the option in progress
• The number of records already downloaded
• The number of records in the queue
The example shown above is the display after the Door groups are selected and
the download is started. The 12th record is being downloaded from 128
available. There are 5 left to download.

Download all

1-Abort 2-Users 3-Grps 4-Tz 5-Hol

Option:

Select the database to be downloaded.

1. Abort Aborts any download in progress. Erases the current database being
downloaded to the four-door/four-lift DGP.
2. Users All users
3. Grps All door groups and floor groups
4. Tz Timezones 0 to 24
5. Hol Holidays

Advisor Master Programming Guide 139

25-Display last card
Show the system code and I.D number of the last card read by a reader
connected to the ATS system databus (for doors 1 to 16 only, not for doors 17 to
64 on four-door/four-lift DGP).

Last Card RAS SC=23 User=987654

Press ENTER

In this example the display shows the system code as “SC=0023” and the cars ID
as “User=987654”.

How to program
• Enter: Return to the Programming menu.
Note: The card must have a valid format that the system is programmed to
recognise.
If the correct system code is not entered in option 20, only the system number is
displayed and not the card ID.
If the correct system code is programmed in option 20, the system code and card
ID are displayed.

26-Reserved menu
Reserved. Do not use.

27-Reserved menu
Reserved. Do not use.

140 Advisor Master Programming Guide

28-To remote devices
Use this option to access the programming menus for 1-Door RASs (e.g.
ATS1270) or four-door/four-lift DGPs (e.g. ATS1250/1260). These remote
devices have additional menu’s that can be accessed via the control panel using
this menu.
The remote device has to be:
• Connected to the ATS system databus
• Addressed as a RAS or DGP with on-board DIP switches
• Programmed to be polled in the menu “3-RAS database” (page 39, RASs
only) or “4-DGP database” (page 48, DGPs only)
• Programmed with the correct type (DGPs only) in menu “4-DGP database” on
page 48.

Select the device type

Remote Device: 1-DGP 2-RAS
Device:

To establish a connection to the remote device, select the device type first. The
type is either a RAS (e.g. ATS1270, 1-Door RAS) or a DGP (e.g. ATS1250/1260,
four-door/four-lift DGP).

Select the device to program

Select the device number to program. The number is the same number as set
using the DIP switches on the device.
For further information on programming the remote device, see the programming
guide for the device.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 141

29-Computer connection
Holds programming concerning connection to a computer running software
package to program or control the ATS system (e.g. ATS8100).
See also the “Service menu” in Advisor Master Manager Manual.
When connecting the panel directly via the J18 (on-board RS232 port) or
connecting the panel via the ATS1801 computer/printer interface, it is not
necessary to set menus 29.1 to 29.4.
When connecting the panel as a remote connection: via the on-board PSTN
dialler or the ISDN interface (ATS7100) (300 baud) or via a stand-alone ISDN or
PSTN modem connected to the ATS1801 computer / printer interface
(4800 baud), at least Menu 29.1 needs to be set to ON.
Note: Every Advisor Master control panel has address ‘0’ as the default. When
operating in multi panel configurations with 2 or more panels (only applicable with
TITAN Security System Software) you have to set the corresponding panel
address in Menu “Computer address” on page 145.
To ensure optimum security, it is advisable to select the following options for
menus 29.1 to 29.4:
• Menu 29.1 — Yes
• Menu 29.2 — No
• Menu 29.3 — No
• Menu 29.4 — No

Computer connection settings

Enable remote up/download

Yes –Enable Remote Up/Download

*-Change 0-Skip

Specify if connecting to a remote computer is possible.

Yes: A remote connection (up/download) is possible.
No: Remote Up/Download is not possible.
Press 0 to go directly to Menu 29.8
Notes
• Set this option to Yes to use menus 29.2 to 29.5.
• Before commissioning a system, the Advisor Master control panel must be
provided with a Security Password in Menu 29.12.

142 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Up/download if any area armed

No –Up/Download if any Area Armed

*-Change 0-Skip

Note: Option 29.1 must be set to Yes to use this option.

Specifies if connecting via dialler to a remote computer is possible if any area is
armed. If set to No and a remote connection is established, the panel will be
disconnected when the user arms the system.
Yes: A remote connection is possible if an area is armed.
No: A remote connection is not possible if any area is armed.
Press 0 to go directly to menu 29.8

Enable remote control

No –Enable Remote Control

*-Change 0-Skip

Specifies if arming areas, controlling outputs and door control is allowed from a
remote computer via dialler.
Yes: Remote arming of areas, controlling outputs and door control is allowed,
when disarmed.
No: Remote arming of areas, controlling outputs and door control is not allowed,
when disarmed.
Press 0 to go directly to menu 29.8
Note: This option will only disable remote control function and not status
requests, and will only operate if 29.1 is set to Yes, and also depends on option
29.2 and the status of the areas.

Remote control if any area armed

No –Remote Control if any Area Armed

*-Change 0-Skip

Note: Option 29.1 must be set to Yes to use this option.

Specifies if disarming and arming areas, controlling outputs and door control is
allowed from a remote computer via dialler.
Yes: Remote disarming and arming of areas, controlling outputs and door control
is allowed.
No: Remote disarming and arming of areas, controlling outputs and door control
is not allowed.
Press 0 to go directly to menu 29.8

Advisor Master Programming Guide 143

Use modem init string

Yes Use Modem Init. String

Change 0 - Skip

Note: Option 29.1 must be set to Yes to use this option.

Yes: Up/download uses a compatible modem connected to the ATS1801.
No: Up/download uses the built-in modem.
Note: Refer to options (29.1, 29.2, 29.3, 29.4) only for incoming calls or call-
backs. Events sent via modem depend on options 29.6, 29.7 and the computer
phone number.

Enter modem init string

End Enter 32 Char. Modem Init String

If Menu 29.5 is set to Yes, enter the modem initialization string (you can enter up
to 32 characters.) This modem initialization string is sent to a compatible modem
on the ATS1801 (serial printer/computer interface board). The 32 character entry
allows for the following characters: @&/=%+-,;
Press OFF or “*” twice to move onto Menu 29.6.

Report alarms to computer

No –Report Alarm Events to Computer

*-Change 0-Skip

If alarms have to be reported to a computer.

Yes: Alarms will be reported using the computer telephone number.
No: No alarms will be reported to the computer.
Press 0 to go directly to Computer Telephone Number.

Report access events

No –Report Access Events to Computer

*-Change 0-Skip

If access control events have to be reported to a computer.

Yes: Access control events will be reported using the computer telephone
number.
No: No access control events will be reported to the computer.
Press 0 to go directly to Computer Telephone Number.

144 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Computer telephone number

*-Pause, Ph No:
Cmp:

Holds the telephone number to be dialled by a modem connected to the

ATS1801 printer/computer interface to set up a remote up/download connection.

Up/Download callback number

*-Pause, Ph No:
Cbk:

Holds the telephone number to be called back to set up a remote up/download

connection. Only used for up/download when dialling into the ATS system.

Service telephone number

*-Pause, Ph No:
Srv:

Holds the telephone number to be dialled to set up a connection to a computer.

The service telephone number will be dialled if an user activates the option “Dial
management software”.

Computer address

Computer Address: 0000

Address:

Holds the address to identify the panel to a up/download software package.

If not used, program “0”.

Security password

Security Password 0000000000

Pass:

The ATS control panel requires a security password before granting access to
the panel using the upload/download PC software (e.g. ATS8100). A connection
can be made using a telephone line (dial-up) or using RS232, if the interface is
available (ATS1801).
Security passwords are always 10 digits. The default password is 0000000000.
The ATS8100 up/download software can always connect to an ATS control panel
with the default password. However, it updates the password to the password
programmed in the up/download software for the ATS control panel currently
opened.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 145

Connection attempts

Connection Attempts 255, Failed 0

Attempts:

Enter the number of attempts that can be made to set up a connection to a

computer. The number of attempt only increases if a connection to a modem is
established, but no correct security password has been received. The display
also shows the number of failed attempts.

Number of rings before answering

Number Of Rings: 0
Rings:

Enter the number of rings before answering an incoming call. If set to 0, incoming
calls will not be answered at all.

Number of calls before answering

Number Of Calls Before Answer: 0

Calls:

Enter the number of calls before answering an incoming call. If set to 0, incoming
calls will not be answered at all. Each incoming call will have to exceed the
number of rings, set in “Number of rings before answering”.

Answering machine defeat

NO – Answering Machine Defeat

*-Change 0-Skip

If the number of rings programmed and the number of calls is met, the next
incoming call will be answered immediately.
See also “Number of rings before answering” and “Number of calls before
answering”

Reserved

Use Bell 103 protocol

NO – BELL Modem
*-Change 0-Skip

Enables BELL 103 modem tones for the PSTN or ISDN analogue line connection
for Computer reporting.

146 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Connection type
Determines which dialler (on board PSTN or plug in ISDN) the panel will connect
/ report to the computer.

Option Description
0 PSTN
1 ISDN
2 Not Used
3 GSM
4 Universal Interface

Authorize computer connection

YES-Authorize a computer connection

*-Change 0-Skip

Specifies if the computer connection requires an authorization.

Yes: The connection must be authorized by a user with an appropriate access
level.
No: Computer connection can be established at any time.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 147

30-Printer
Program the details for the printer. To obtain a printer output from the ATS
control panel, a serial printer interface (ATS1802) or serial computer and printer
interface (ATS1801) has to be fitted.

Printer settings
Enable real-time printer

NO – Enable Real Time Printer

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables the printer output to print in real-time.

Yes: Enable the printer port on the ATS control panel to print each event as it
happens. "Print History" can still be used, if required (see manager guide).
No: A printer is not connected or you do not require the printer to run in real time.
"Print History" must be used to obtain a print-out.
Press 0 to leave Printer menu.
Note: Before anything will be printed real-time, either “Print alarm events” below”
above or “Print access control events” below have to be set to Yes.

Print alarm events

No –Print Alarm Events

*-Change 0-Skip

Prints all alarm events.

Yes: All alarm events are printed.
No: Alarm events are not printed.
Press 0 to leave Printer menu.
Note: Before anything will be printed real-time, either “Print alarm events” above”
or “Print access control events” below have to be set to Yes.

Print access control events

No –Print Access Control Events

*-Change 0-Skip

This function prints all access control events.

Yes: All access control events are printed.
No: Access control events are not printed.
Press 0 to leave Printer menu.
Note: Before anything will be printed real-time, either “Print alarm events” above”
above or “Print access control events” have to be set to Yes.

148 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Print data outside timezone

No –Print Data Outside Timezone

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables the printer to only operate outside the timezone, and not during it.
Yes: The printer is only active if the timezone specified is invalid.
No: The printer is only active if the timezone specified is valid.
Press 0 to leave Printer menu.
Notes
• Any event that takes place when no data is dumped to the printer will be lost
for the printer. Use “Print history” in the user menu to print these events.
• “Enable real-time printer” on page 148 has to be set to Yes to be able to print
events.

Print during timezone

NO – Print During Timezone 0

Tz No:

The printer is only active during the timezone specified unless print data outside
timezone (above) is set to Yes. The default timezone is TZ 0 (always valid).

Printer options

Epson Printer 9600, 7, e, 1

Option:

You can program the printer interface for an Epson (compatible) dot matrix or
HPII (compatible) laser printer with optional communication settings.

Option Name Baud Word Parity Stop

1 Epson Printer 9600 7 bit Even 1
2 Laser HPII 9600 8 bit None 1
3 Laser HPII 19200 8 bit None 1
4 Epson Printer 9600 7 bit Odd 1
5 Epson Printer 9600 7 bit None 1
6 Epson Printer 9600 8 bit None 1
7 Epson Printer 9600 8 bit Odd 1
8 Epson Printer 9600 8 bit Even 1

Advisor Master Programming Guide 149

31-Battery testing
The battery test records the details of the automatic battery test procedure and
enables manual battery test to be started. A battery disconnect check is also
automatically performed. If a battery is disconnected for more then 10 minutes, a
warning will be given.
During the battery test, the control panel and/or DGPs, and all auxiliary driven
devices, are powered from the battery. Devices are tested one at a time, making
sure that not all devices switch to battery test at once.

Select battery test program

Battery Testing: 1-Program, 2-Test
Option:

Select 1 to program the battery test options or 2 to perform a manual battery test.

Programming battery test

Battery test frequency

Batt Test Frequency - Disabled

*-Change, 0-Skip

Specify how often the automatic battery test should be performed.

Use Menu to select one of the available options:
• Disabled
• Every working day
• Every Monday
• First Monday of month
• Every day
Press 0 to move to “Start battery test”.

Start battery test

Start Battery Test 00:00

Hours:

Program the time of day, in hours and minutes, when the battery test will start.

Battery test period

Run Battery Test For 000

Minutes:

Program the period, in minutes (with a minimum of 2), that the automatic battery
test will run. If a battery test on any device fails, that device immediately restores
AC power.

150 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Select battery test
Manual battery test

No DGP Battery Testing In Progress

Press ENTER

This allows the ATS panel and DGP batteries to be tested manually. This test
does not affect the automatic battery testing. If a DGP is tested, the DGP number
will be displayed.

How to program
Enter: Move to the next manual battery test display.

Battery test report

All DGP Battery Tested OK

Press ENTER

Displays the results of previous manual battery testing.

How to program
Enter: Move to the next manual battery test display.

Select DGP for battery test

Manual Battery Test For DGP # 1-16

DGP:

Specify the DGP number of the unit to be tested.

• DGP 1 to 15
• ATS control panel = DGP 16
Only 1 unit at a time can be selected.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 151

32-Custom LCD message
This records 32 characters of customised text that is displayed on the top line of
LCD arming station(s) in place of the normal display. Text is considered any
configuration of up to 32 characters. They can include numbers, spaces or
punctuation.

Aritech, (*) - End

Aritech

Use the text option on the keypad to enter a text of up to 32 characters. Keys 1
to 9 have alphabetical characters printed above them. To enter a letter, press the
key the number of times relative to the position of the letter. Both upper and
lower case letters are available as well as numerical values and spaces. See
Figure 1 on page 104.
Note: When the Menu key is used, only letters preceding the cursor are saved. If
you want to save an existing word, you must enter it again or, using the Enter
key, move the cursor to the end of the word.
Time and Date can be displayed in the RAS LCD display if there are no alarms
active. By entering a point (.) as the first character in custom message, the time
and date will be displayed in the following format: (HH:MM DAY/MONTH/YEAR)
For example: 8:45 02/10/2001.

152 Advisor Master Programming Guide

33-Program next service
Program the date on which the next routine service call is due and the message
is to be displayed. The user will be prompted with a programmable text on the
LCD arming stations to call the installer.

Maintenance date
Service Required at 0/0/0
Enter Day:

Enter the next date on which the user will get a text displayed to signal that
service is due.

Maintenance message
Routine Service Due, (*) - End
Routine Service Due

Program a text (32 characters maximum) that will be displayed on the LCD
arming stations on the date specified as the service date.

How to program
See “32-Custom LCD message” on page 152.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 153

34-Program system event flags
Event flags are set when specified events occur in the system, such as a mains
failure, a zone generating an alarm or an entry time running.
The system event flags are triggered on system wide events, like mains failures
or DGP’s going offline.
For more information regarding event flags, see “Event Flags” on page 179.

System event flag settings

Mains fail event flag

Mains Fail No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a Mains Failure is detected on the ATS control
panel or a DGP.
Note: Do not use a preset event flag number (1 to 16). Program 0 to disable an
event flag.

Low battery event flag

Low Battery No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a low battery is detected on the ATS control
panel or a DGP.
See also “Mains fail event flag” above.

Fuse fail event flag

Fuse Fail Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a fuse fail is detected on the ATS control panel
or a DGP.
See also “Mains fail event flag” above.

Tamper event Flag

Tamper No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a Panel Tamper is detected on the ATS control
panel or a DGP (includes RAS tampers).
See also “Mains fail event flag” above.

154 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Siren fail event flag

Siren Fail No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a Siren Fail condition is detected on the ATS
panel or a DGP.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

DGP isolated event flag

DGP Isolated No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a DGP has been isolated via User menu 16,
Isolate/deisolate RAS/DGP.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

DGP offline event flag

DGP Offline No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a DGP that is programmed to be polled, does
not reply to polling.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

RAS offline event flag

RAS Offline No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a Remote Arming Station, which has been
programmed to be polled, does not reply to polling.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Duress event Flag

Duress No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when a duress alarm occurs.

See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Film out event Flag

Film Out No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when the film count for a camera exceeds the
programmed film out level described in “Film out level” on page 71.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 155

See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Report fail event flag

Report Fail (FTC) No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when the ATS control panel fails to report to the
central station (also referred to as FTC).
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Test mode event flag

Testmode No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when the ATS panel is in test mode.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

All armed event flag

All Armed No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is activated when all areas to report opening/closing are armed,
there are no alarm conditions, and no entry/exit timers are running.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Keypad buzzer event flag

Keypad Buzzer No Event Flag

Event Flag:

When this event flag is activated, the keypad buzzers are activated. The event
flag also has to be assigned to the events that you want the keypad buzzer to
sound on.
See also “Mains fail event flag” on page 154.

Not in use

Not in use

Dialler active system event flag

Dialer Active No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This flag is active whenever a dialler connection between the panel and CS is
active.

External siren test event flag

156 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Ext Siren Test No Event Flag
Event Flag:

This flag is active whenever a siren test is active.

All armed pulse event flag

All Armed No Event Flag

Event Flag:

If “NFA2P” option on page 84 is Yes, an event flag/output is provided with or

without event recorder that will be active for 20 seconds, after fully armed
condition is true.

Computer connection active

Computer Connection No Event Flag

Event Flag:

The flag is active whenever a computer connection between the panel and
management software (Titan) is active. The flag is not to be activated until after
the connection has been established.

Line fault

Line Fault No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is active whenever a line fault condition is active.

Battery test active

Battery test active No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Battery test active event flag is activated when a battery test is being performed
on the Advisor Master Panel or a DGP.

Engineer walk test

Engineer walk test No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is active whenever an Engineer walk test is active.

Engineer walk test reset

Engineer walk test reset No Event Flag

Event Flag:

This event flag is active for 5 seconds after each walk test (failed, or completed).

Advisor Master Programming Guide 157

System A (ACPO)

System A (ACPO) No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Event flag associates an event flag with a system A event. A system A event flag
is set whenever any ACPO area A flag is set.

System B (ACPO)

System B (ACPO) No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Event flag associates an event flag with a system B event. A system B event flag
is set whenever any ACPO area B flag is set.

User walk test

User Walk Test No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Indicates that a walk test is running.

User walk test reset

User Walk Test Reset No Event Flag

Event Flag:

Indicates that a walk test was reset.

Panic alarm

Panic Alarm No Event Flag

Event Flag:

The PA Global Alarm Event Flag goes active on a trigger of any PA Area Alarm
Event Flag.
The PA Global Alarm Event Flag goes inactive on a state change from active to
non-active of any PA Area Alarm Event Flags.

RAS isolated

RAS Isolated No Event Flag

Event Flag:

A RAS connected to the panel LAN may be isolated via the keypad, via the Titan
Control Panel menu RAS (Isolate/De-isolate), or automatically isolated as a
result of timed persistent failure (e.g. ACPO, NFA2P).
When any RAS is isolated, regardless of how it was done, the flag will be set.
De-isolating the RAS will reset the flag.

158 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Panel CPU restart

Panel CPU Restart No Event Flag

Event Flag:

The Panel CPU Restart even flag becomes active after the panel CPU is
restarted. It remains active until the CPU restart event is acknowledged.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 159

35-Program macro logic
Macro logic provides a powerful tool for activating zones or event flags under
specific conditions. These conditions are macro inputs being triggered, logic
equations combining the macro inputs and output conditions.
Up to four macro inputs can be included in the logic equation. A macro input is an
event flag or an output. Each macro input in the logic equation can be
programmed as an AND or an OR function and can be programmed to invert the
logic.
Programming options are provided so that the macro result will trigger a macro
output as a pulse, time, on delay, off delay or latch when activated.

Figure 3: Overview of macro logic

Event flag / output 1

Event flag / output 2

Macro logic equation
“1 AND 2 OR 3”
Event flag / output 3
Macro output timing
T1 >> T2

Event flag / output 4 Event flag or zone

Caution: It is very important to plan the Macro Logic carefully on paper, noting all
details, and the origin of every zone and/or event flags, before attempting to
program.

See also “Event Flags” (page 179) and “16-Event to output” (page 124).

Program number
Macro Logic Number
Macro No:

Enter the number of the macro logic program. There are 24 programs available.

160 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Configuring program
Macro output function

M 1 Disabled
*-Change, 0-Exit

The result of a macro, the macro output, will trigger an event flag or a zone. The
macro output can have some timing functions.

Option Function
Disabled This macro logic program is disabled.
Non Timed Follows the result of the logic equation only. If an event flag or output for this
macro changes, the logic equation will be calculated again.
On Pulse Activates for the programmed time or the active period of the logic result,
whichever is the shortest.
On Timed Activates for the programmed time regardless of the macro output changing.
On Delay Activates after the programmed time period unless the result of the logic equation
is no longer valid.
Off Delay Follows the result of the logic equation, but remains active for the time
programmed after the result of the logic equation is no longer active
Latched Activates on any of the first three macro inputs in the logic equation and is only
reset by the fourth macro input. Any programmed AND / OR function is not used)

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Menu: Display a new output function.
• 0: Leave the 35-Program macro logic menu.
• Enter: Save the displayed function and move to the next display.

Time

M1 Times for 0 Seconds

Time:

The time period (2 to 255 seconds) that is used when any of the timed macro
output functions is selected (pulse, on timed, on delay or off delay). Use any
value of 2 or higher.

Macro output triggers EF or zone

M 1 Activates Event Flag 0

*-Change, No:

Specify if the macro output should trigger an event flag or a zone and which
event flag or zone.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 161

The macro output is triggered as a result of the logic equation on the macro
inputs. The output will behave as programmed in the “Macro output function”.

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• ?, Enter: Enter and display new event flag or zone number. Enter the same
number twice to invert the macro output. It will now trigger the event flag or
output if the result of the equation is not true. An inverted macro output is
recognised by the exclamation mark (!) preceding the number.
• Menu: Select “Event Flag” or “Zone”.
• Enter: Save the displayed details and move to the next display.

Macro inputs

M 1 = E0 Or E0 Or E0 Or E0
*-Chg, Input 1:

Program up to four macro inputs (event flag or output numbers) and whether
each of those inputs performs an AND or an OR function in the logic equation.
When all conditions of the logic equation are met, the macro output is active and
the event flag or zone programmed in the previous step is activated (depending
on any timing function programmed on the macro output).

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• ?, Enter: Enter and display new event flag or output number. Enter the same
number twice to invert the macro input. Before calculating the result of the
macro logic equation, the input is inverted. An inverted input is recognised by
the exclamation mark (!) preceding the “E” or “R”.
• Menu: Select “Event Flag” (E) or “Output” (R).
• Enter: Save the displayed details and return to the original macro logic
display.

Macro logic equation

M 1 = E0 Or E0 Or E0 Or E0
*-Chg, Logic 1:

Specify the logical operators that create the macro logic equation. Two operators
are available: AND and OR.

Operator Description
OR Result is true if one of the inputs was active.
AND Result is true only if both inputs are active.

162 Advisor Master Programming Guide

How to program
Press one of these keypad buttons to:
• Menu: Select “OR” or “AND”.
• Enter: Save the displayed details and return to the original macro logic
display.
Notes
• Any unused macro inputs MUST be left as an OR.
• NAND and NOR functions can be made using the invert operator on the
macro output or the macro inputs. NAND = INVERT (Macro Input 1) OR
INVERT (Macro Input 2). NOR = INVERT (Macro Input 1) AND INVERT
(Macro Input 2).

36 to 41-Reserved menus
Reserved. Do not use.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 163

42-Reporting class database
Reporting of alarms depends on the settings in Reporting of zone in “1-Zone
database” on page 7. This setting is a reporting class. There are 8 classes
containing 6 conditions that can be selected for reporting.

Select the reporting class

Class Number
Class No:

Select the class to program. The available classes are:

Class nbr Name

1 Medical
2 Fire alarms
3 Panic alarms
4 Burglar alarms
5 General alarms
6 24 Hr alarm
7 Fire supervisory
8 System alarms

Each class has multiple types of alarms it can report. e.g The class Panic Alarms
contain SIA reporting for both PA (panic alarm) and HA (hold-up alarm).
For more information on classes or reporting, see “9-Communication options” on
page 94 and “Reporting” on page 182.

Class settings
Select the class condition

Class 1: Medical - 1. Alarm

Condition No:

Select the condition to program. Select one of the following conditions:

Condition Reports
1 Alarms
2 Alarm Restore
3 Tamper
4 Tamper Restore
5 Inhibit
6 Inhibit Restore (=uninhibit)

164 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Report to Central Station 1

YES-Report Alarm to CS1

*-Change 0-Skip

Use this option to select whether this condition should be reported to Central
Station 1.

Report to Central Station 2

See “Report to Central Station 1” above.

Report to Central Station 3

See “Report to Central Station 1” above.

Report to Central Station 4

See “Report to Central Station 1” above.

Enable Audio Listen in for this condition

NO – Enable Audio Listen In

*-Change 0-Skip

Specify if audio listen in is allowed for this condition.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 165

43-Test calls
This menu holds programming regarding test calls.

Test call settings

Start test call

Start First Test Call at: 00:00

Hours:

Enter the time in hours and minutes, when a test call should be made. The time
programmed is based on the real time clock.

Test call interval

Test Call Interval 00 Hours

Hours:

Specify the interval between test calls (in hours).

Extend test call

NO – Extend Test Call

*-Change 0-Skip

Only send a test call if no reporting during the test call interval.
Yes: Only if no event at all has been reported during the test call interval, a test
call will be made.
No: Test calls will be made after each test call interval.

44 to 49-Reserved menus
Reserved. Do not use.

166 Advisor Master Programming Guide

50-Channel mapping
1–Inputs 2–Areas 3-System
Option:

This is the 200 Baud FSK French communication option

Inputs
Each sub menu is broken down into group menus. For example:

Input group 1-16

Enter channel number 00 to 99 for each input (zone). The defaults are:
• Inputs 1 to 72 > channels 1 to 72.
• Inputs 73 to 256 > channel 73.

Areas
Each sub menu is broken down into group menus. For example,

Area group 1 to 8
Enter channel number 00 to 99 for each area. A separate channel can be
programmed for auto arm/disarm events. The defaults are:
• Areas 1 to 16 > channels 74 to 89

System
Each sub menu is broken down into group menus. For example,

System group 1 to 10
The user can program a channel number, 00 to 99, for each of the available
system events. System events will be displayed as System Event 1 to System
Event 40. A user cross reference table will then be used to determine which
event is System Event 1 etc.
The defaults are:

Event name Channel (default) Channel type

1 RAS Code Attempts 00-99 (90) A
2 Courier In 00-99 (Dis) A
3 Guard Down 00-99 (Dis) A
4 Time Changed 00-99 (Dis) A
5 Auto Test Call 00-99 (Dis) A
6 Service In/Out 00-99 (Dis) A,R

Advisor Master Programming Guide 167

 Event name Channel (default) Channel type
7 Request Service 00-99 (Dis) A
8 Summary RAS Offline 00-99 (91) A,R
9 Summary DGP Offline 00-99 (91) A,R
10 DGP Reset 00-99 (Dis) A
11 Summary DGP Mains Fail 00-99 (92) A,R
12 Summary DGP Low Batt 00-99 (93) A,R
13 Summary DGP Tamper 00-99 (94) A,R
14 Summary DGP Siren Tamper 00-99 (95) A,R
15 Summary Duress Code 00-99 (96) A,R
16 Summary Remote Log-In 00-99 (97) A,R
17 Summary Filmout 00-99 (Dis) A,R
18 Summary Program Mode Ent. 00-99 (98) A,R
19 Disarm After Alarm 00-99 (Dis) A
20 Input Isolated 00-99 (99) A,R
21 Input Fault 00-99 (99) A,R
22 Manual Test 00-99 (Dis) A
- -
40 Not Used

168 Advisor Master Programming Guide

51-Engineering reset
Engineer reset?
*-Reset 0 - Skip

Engineer Reset?
This option allows the engineer to perform a reset without having to calculate the
“ATS System Code”. When the installer presses the “*” button, the RAS displays
“Done”.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 169

52-Voice reporting
BA Burglar Alarm – Voice Message 0
Msg. No.

Reporting code no.

Program the voice messages to be transmitted to the monitoring station, if voice
protocol is programmed. See “9-Communication options” on page 94.
Voice Messages can be programmed to report on the following alarm events.
More than 1 event may have the same voice message programmed. Range is
from 0 to 14.

Table 11: Default table

Reporting Code No. Reporting Code Voice Alarm Message
1 Burglar Alarm Default 0 = No message assigned
2 Tamper Alarm
3 Hold-up Alarm
4 Panic Alarm
5 Fire Alarm
6 Medical Alarm
7 Technical Alarm
8 Mains Fail
9 DGP Offline
10 Area Disarmed
11 Area Armed

As well as the above, the user can also program alarm messages to the following
event codes, allowing for greater flexibility as required. Macros can then be used
to trigger these event codes from various sources.
E.g. an input can be programmed to report to event code 131 BA Perimeter. The
input can then be triggered using macros etc.

Table 12: User table

Reporting code No. Reporting code Voice alarm message
12 130 BA Burglary
13 131 BA Perimeter
14 132 BA Interior
15 133 BA 24 Hour
16 134 BA Entry/Exit
17 135 BA Day/Night

170 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Reporting code No. Reporting code Voice alarm message
18 136 BA Outdoor
19 137 BA Tamper
20 138 BA Near Alarm
21 140 UA General Alarm
22 Low battery
23 Low battery restore
24 Mains restore
25 Technical restore

Note that event code 130 BA Burglary in the user table and code 1 – Burglar
Alarm BAA in table 1 are the same event codes (130). If 130, BA in the user table
is programmed with an alarm message, then this will have priority over event
code 1 - BA Burglar alarm in table 1.

Voice message no.

This is the voice message number (values range from 0 to 14) stored in the voice
module (ATS7200) and assigned to specified event numbers. Value '0' means
“No message assigned”

Voice message description (optional)

This option allows the installer to add comments about a specified message.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 171

53-Program DVMRe

DVMRe alarm handling via the printer port

In a conventional alarm-handling configuration the alarm devices are connected
via the alarm PCB on the back of the DVMRe unit. Each alarm input corresponds
with the camera input of the same function.
Alarm input to camera assignments can be changed on 10 and 16-channel
models via the DVMRe programming.
On an input trigger, the internal buzzer will be activated and an on-screen alarm
display will be activated.
Macros can be programmed to achieve full CCTV scenarios.
Many different options are possible depending on the programming of the
DVMRe.
An additional feature, which can be combined with external an alarm triggering, is
a text insertion to the triggered alarm frame.
The ATS printer interface connection to the DVMRe provides all in one.

DVMRe alarm input map

DVMRe Alarm Input Map

Alarm Input:

“*”- Next, DVMRe Alarm Input 1 No relay

Relay:

This menu controls the setting to trigger an alarm input from the DVMRe by
programming an output of the ATS panel. In total 16 DVMRe alarm inputs can be
linked to an ATS output. All 255 ATS outputs can be programmed.
Setting or un-setting an ATS output triggers a DVMRe alarm input. ATS outputs
are used rather than event flags because outputs can be activated via time zones
as well.
The DVMRe can be programmed to execute a macro linked to a DVMRe input.

High Level Interface (HLI) control flags

Enable DVMRe interface

YES – Enable DVMRe Interface

*-Change 0-Skip

Enables the High Level Integration between the ATS panel and the DVMRe.
Yes: The ATS panel and DVMRe connection can be established and the next
following control flags will be considered.

172 Advisor Master Programming Guide

No: Overrides all other control flags and there will be no communication at all
between the ATS panel and the DVMRe.
Note: If the DVMRe HLI is used, the ATS panel will no longer be able to
communicate with a serial printer.

Enable time update

YES-Enable Time Update

*-Change 0-Skip

This feature will ensure that the time and date of the DVMR are synchronised
approximately every 60 seconds with the ATS panel. When performing video
history searches the time and date will be based upon the occurrence of ATS
panel events.
Yes: The ATS panel time and date will be synchronised to the DVMRe.
No: No time and date synchronisation will take place.

Enable event text insertion

YES-Enable Text Insertion

*-Change 0-Skip

This option automatically inserts event text from the ATS panel (printer output)
into camera 1 text box of the DVMRe. This text will be associated with the
footage recorded to all cameras with that time stamp.
Yes: The ATS panel will insert the event text to the DVMRe text box.
No: No event text insertion will take place.

Enable alarm feedback

YES-Enable Alarm Feedback

*-Change 0-Skip

The DVMR has the facility to issue user programmable strings on the occurrence
of user definable alarm conditions and motion detection. The strings will be sent
out via the HLI and received by the ATS panel. Based upon the content of the
received strings after processing, the ATS panel can manipulate zone inputs
allowing alarm reporting and control of various types to be performed.
Yes: The DVMRe will send out the user programmable strings on the occurrence
of pre-defined alarm condition.
No: No alarm condition strings will be send out.

Enable history Search and Play

YES-Enable History Search And Play

*-Change 0-Skip

The ATS panel will have a new menu set added which will be used to emulate a
subset of the DVMR front panel controls. This feature will allow an ATS panel

Advisor Master Programming Guide 173

operator to view and search recorded footage via the RAS. This feature will be
used when the DVMR front panel controls are not accessible and the panels
RAS is located next to a spot monitor.
In addition to this, a Search and Play feature will also be supported. This will
allow a user to enter the history menu on the panel RAS and advance the DVMR
playback to the footage recorded at the point of the event occurring. Once the
Search and Play command has been issued to the DVMR, the RAS can display
the DVMR RAS controls so the user can control the payback if the option is
selected.
Yes: Enables the associated RAS (see “RAS permission” below) to search for
and/or play a particular footage.
No: No search or play is allowed via the RAS.

RAS permission
No RAS Assigned
RAS Permitted:

2,
RAS Permitted:

DVMRe 1-Play, 2-Search, 3-Camera, 4-View

Menu:

The RAS permission menu enables the Installer to select, which RASs are
connected to the panel, have permission to issue Search and Play. It also
controls commands to the DVMRe while in the Quick or User Histories.
Up to 16 RASs can be selected in this menu option to have Search and Play and
command control of the DVMRe.

174 Advisor Master Programming Guide

54-Test zone
54 – Engineer walk test
0 – Exit, Menu

Introduction
The engineer walk test allows testing of all zones that are configured for an
engineering walk test in selected areas. These areas are tested by a
technician/engineer. This test is independent to the zone configured test type and
is only run manually from a new installer menu item.
Zones are configured to be included in the engineer walk test (See 19.1.33,
Engineer walk test). The default is Yes (include in engineer walk test).
A technician/engineer starts the engineer walk test from menu 54. The areas do
not need to be armed/disarmed before a new test is started. The test can be
initiated whenever needed.

Procedure
When starting the engineer walk test the user will be prompted to select area/s to
test by the display shown below. Initially no areas are selected and the top line of
the display would be blank.
The user selects an area by entering the area number followed by the Enter key.
Areas selected are displayed as shown on the display below. Areas will be
masked so that only areas that are available for the test are those that both the
user and RAS have access to. If a user enters an area that is not available the
RAS buzzer will sound a warning (several short beeps) and the area will not be
displayed in the selected list.

1, 2
0 – All, Area

The user may select all available areas by pressing the “0” key followed by the
Enter key. Pressing Clear will cause the test to be aborted and the user will
return to the installer menu. If aborted at this stage, no event (test started, failed,
etc) will be logged and no test event flag will be set.
Press Enter (without an area number) to start the test.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 175

When the walk test starts, a new walk test event flag will be activated to allow
detectors to be configured to automatically go into walk test and the display
shown below indicates all zones to be tested. If the number of zones to test
exceeds the number that the display can show, then “,.” is displayed at the end of
the list. If so, the user can see all zones to test by viewing name of each zone
individually as is described below.

Untested On 1, 2, 4
0-Cancel, Zone

Each zone that transitions from sealed to unsealed and then back to sealed will
be marked as tested. While the test is running, the displayed list of untested
zones updates automatically without user action so that zones disappear from
the displayed list as they are tested.
While the test is running, the user may enter the number of an untested zone
followed by the Enter key to display that zone’s name as shown below. Here the
user may press Next (down arrow) to scroll through the names untested zones,
or press Enter to return to the numeric list of untested zones shown above.

Untested On 1. PIR In Office

NEXT or ENTER

The test is cancelled if either the “0” or Clear or key is pressed. There is also a
maximum time limit on the test, “Disarm test time” on page 63. The test fails if
this timer expires. In either case, the “Test not completed” display shown below
will be displayed. A message is sent to the central station to indicate test failed,
see events logged table below.
Note: The warning timer functions as normal during this test. That is, a warning
will sound (if warning time programmed) in the normal fashion.

Test not completed

Press ENTER

Otherwise, once all zones have been tested successfully a message “Test
Complete” is displayed, and a message is sent to the central station (see events
logged table below).

Test completed
Press ENTER

If the Clear key is pressed while the test is running, “Please wait” display shown
below is displayed while the aux output is pulsed (described further below).
When the aux output pulsing is completed, the walk test will be exited
automatically to the install menu.

Test not completed

Please wait

At the end of the walk test, the walk test event flag will be deactivated.

176 Advisor Master Programming Guide

The test will cause the following events to be logged. These events are sent as
messages to the central monitoring station:

Event logged When logged

ACCESS_TEST_STARTED When test started
WALK_TEST_ZONE_TESTED When a zone is tested and Titan is connected to the
panel. (computer connection active event flag set), Event
message includes number of zone tested.
This event is not sent to central stations.
WALK_TEST_ZONE_NOT_TESTED When a zone Fails the test and Titan is connected to the
panel (computer connection active event flag set). Event
message includes number of zone tested.
This event is not sent to central stations.
ACCESS_TEST_FAILED If user cancels the test or on test timeout (failed)
ACCESS_TEST_COMPLETED Test completed successfully

Note: If Titan is connected to the panel (computer connection active event flag
set), the “WALK_TEST_ZONE_TESTED”,
“WALK_TEST_ZONE_NOT_TESTED”, “ACCESS_TEST_FAILED” or
“ACCESS_TEST_COMPLETED” will be logged in the panel and send to Titan
history.
If Titan is NOT connected to the panel (computer connection active event flag
NOT set), the “WALK_TEST_ZONE_TESTED” and
“WALK_TEST_ZONE_NOT_TESTED” will be Ignored and not logged.Only the
“ACCESS_TEST_FAILED” or “ACCESS_TEST_COMPLETED” will be logged in
the panel.
This is to prevent the panel memory from being filled with events when Titan is
not connected.
After each walk test (failed, or completed) an “Engineer Walk Test Reset” system
event flag will be activated for 5 seconds. Users may use this event flag to switch
the aux output (output 251) to reset any latched detectors in alarm.
If the user presses the Enter key to exit the test menu while the aux output is
deactivated, a closing message will be displayed as shown below. The test will
then automatically exit from the engineer walk test when the aux output is
restored.

Test closing
Please wait

See also Event flags:

• “Engineer walk test” on page 157
• “Engineer walk test reset” on page 157

55-Reserved

Advisor Master Programming Guide 177

56-Siren calibration
The siren calibration allows the panel to calculate the required impedance
tresholds for the connected siren. The treshold values are stored in the panel and
used to ensure reliable siren fault and tamper detection.

Siren: 1-External, 2-Internal, 3-Strobe

Siren:

To start the calibration, choose the appropriate output first.

This starts the appropriate output measurement.
The calibration may cause one of the following messages.

Table 13: Calibration errors

Message Cause
AS391V - No calibration required In case of the VdS compatible sirens the calibration is not
applicable
Calibration Failure Impossible to set power supply >12 V
Impedance is too low The siren impedance is below the required minimum
Impedance is too high The siren impedance is above the required maximum

If the siren impedance is acceptable, the panel calculates the allowed treshold.

External Siren Calibration in Progress

Please wait...

The panel calculates two allowed impedance ranges, one for mains supply, and
another one, wider, for battery supply.

1.2 – 2.8 & 1 – 3 kOhm

Press ENTER

Notes
• This data is stored in the panel non-volatile memory. It can be changed during
another siren calibration, or by setting the panel to the factory defaults. See
“14-Defaults” on page 116 for more details.
• If the siren has not been calibrated, the panel detects siren faults using the
defalut values. In this case the siren fault detection does not comply with the
EN 50131 regulations.
• The calculated values can be requested and displayed via the management
software.

178 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Event Flags
What are event flags?
Event flags are memory locations in a microprocessor system that register the
occurrence of certain events. Those events can be pre-defined or can be
programmed. In other words: when certain events take place, event flags are
triggered.

Why does the ATS system use event flags?

The ATS system uses event flags to provide the most flexible solution for
activating outputs and manipulating macros. Using event flags gives both options
using the same event flag. It is far more flexible then using fixed output types,
because fixed output types are hard to combine. Using event flags it is possible
to use the same event flag for more then 1 event, resulting in combined events.

What events can trigger event flags?

There is a multitude of events. They range from a zone being activated to a 230
V mains failure, from users opening doors to entry/exit timers running. In total
event flags can be programmed in:
• Zone database as “Zone event flag”. Zones can also be linked to pre-defined
event flags for siren events, armed or disarmed alarm flags and more. Event
flags are triggered when certain events occur regarding this particular zone.
• Area database. Here are event flags triggered for entry or exit timers, sirens
being activated, alarms occurring etc. Event flag are triggered when certain
events in an area occur, regardless off the zone.
• RAS database. When using door commands, a door can be opened.
• Zone Shunt. When a zone is shunted due to opening of a door.
• Summary event flags contain system events like 230 V mains failures or low
battery.
• Macro Logic uses event flags or an output status to manipulate zones or
event flags.
• The 4-door DGP and 4-lift DGP can trigger event flags internally. See the
programming manual for the appropriate DGP.
Some events trigger event flags in different sections. When a zone goes into
alarm:
• The siren is activated (programmed in the area database and the zone
database)
• Also an indicator above the door might be lit, because the zone event flag is
also triggered.
All this happens at the same time, activated by the same event: the zone causing
an alarm.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 179

Which event flags are predefined?
There are 16 predefined event flags. These are:

Event Name Description

1 Internal/External Default Internal/External siren event flag (assigned in area database).
Siren
If set to Yes in the zone database, activates when any
Internal/External siren activates in any area.
2 Armed Alarm If set to Yes on the zone database, activates when an alarm is
generated by the zone and all the areas assigned to the zone are
armed. It is used to activate the system strobe.
3 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
4 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
5 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
6 Disarmed Alarm If set to Yes in the zone database, activates when an alarm is
generated by the zone and one or more of the areas assigned to the
zone are disarmed.
7 Disarmed Alarm As event flag 6
8 24 Hour Alarm If set to Yes in the zone database, activates at any time an alarm is
generated by the zone.
9 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
10 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
11 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
12 Armed Alarm As event flag 2
13 Disarmed Alarm As event flag 6
16 Testing Activates during the arm test. A testing event is used to activate a
device that allows the testing of other devices that need to be tested.
For example activate a light to test a light detector.
The tester event flag activates for half the “Testing event flag time” on
page 65 programmed in programming menu “6-Timers”. The
remaining period of the arm test time is settling time to allow the
tested device to switch back to normal state.
I.e. Make sure that the arm test time is longer than the testing event
time.

More about event flags?

For the usage of event flags, see the sections concerning:
• Menu “1-Zone database” on page 7.
• Menu “2-Area database” on page 29.
• Menu “3-RAS database” on page 39.
• Menu “16-Event to output” on page 124.
• Menu “21-Zone shunts” on page 133.

180 Advisor Master Programming Guide

• Menu “28-To remote devices” on page 141 (four-door DGP and four-lift DGP)
and the appropriate programming guide concerning the appropriate remote
controller.
• Menu “34-Program system event flags” on page 154.
• Menu “35-Program macro logic” on page 160.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 181

Reporting
Reporting in an ATS panel is divided in zone event reporting and system events.
Zones use reporting classes and sub-classes that can be programmed per zone.
In “42-Reporting class database” on page 164 a selection can be made regarding
the conditions to report per class.
Table 14 below shows an overview of the reported event per sub-class and
condition. The column CID holds the reported Contact ID event. SIA holds the
SIA event.

Table 14: Overview of reported events per sub-class

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Medical 1 Medical 100 Alarm E100 MA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 MB
Alarm restore R100 MR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 MU
2 Medical 101 Alarm E101 MA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 MB
Alarm restore R101 MR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 MU
3 Medical 102 Alarm E102 MA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 MB
Alarm restore R102 MR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 MU
Fire 4 Fire 110 Alarm E110 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R110 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
5 Fire 111 Alarm E111 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R111 FR

182 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
6 Fire 112 Alarm E112 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R112 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
7 Fire 113 Alarm E113 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R113 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
8 Fire 114 Alarm E114 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R114 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
9 Fire 115 Alarm E115 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R115 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
10 Fire 116 Alarm E116 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R116 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
11 Fire 117 Alarm E117 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R117 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU

Advisor Master Programming Guide 183

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
12 Fire 118 Alarm E118 FA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R118 FR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
Panic 13 Panic 120 Alarm E120 PA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 PB
Alarm restore R120 PR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 PU
14 Panic 121 Alarm E121 HA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 HB
Alarm restore R121 HR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 HU
15 Panic 122 Alarm E122 PA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 PB
Alarm restore R122 PR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 PU
16 Panic 123 Alarm E123 PA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 PB
Alarm restore R123 PR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 PU
Burglar 17 Burglar 130 Alarm E130 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R130 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
18 Burglar 131 Alarm E131 BA
Tamper E383 TA

184 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R131 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
19 Burglar 132 Alarm E132 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R132 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
20 Burglar 133 Alarm E133 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R133 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
21 Burglar 134 Alarm E134 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R134 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
22 Burglar 135 Alarm E135 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R135 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
23 Burglar 136 Alarm E136 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R136 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
24 Burglar 137 Alarm E137 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R137 BR

Advisor Master Programming Guide 185

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
25 Burglar 138 Alarm E138 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R138 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
General alarms 26 General 140 Alarm E140 UA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 UB
Alarm restore R140 UR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 UU
27 General 141 Alarm E141 GA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 GB
Alarm restore R141 GR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 GU
28 General 142 Alarm E142 ZA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 ZB
Alarm restore R140 ZR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 ZU
29 General 143 Alarm E143 SA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 SB
Alarm restore R143 SR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 SU
30 General 144 Alarm E144 WA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 WB
Alarm restore R144 WR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 WU

186 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
31 General 145 Alarm E145 BA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 BB
Alarm restore R145 BR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 BU
24 Hour alarms 32 24 Hour 150 Alarm E150 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R150 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
33 24 Hour 151 Alarm E151 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R151 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
34 24 Hour 152 Alarm E152 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R152 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
35 24 Hour 153 Alarm E153 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R153 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Alarm restore R570 QU
36 24 Hour 154 Alarm E154 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R150 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
37 24 Hour 155 Alarm E155 QA
Tamper E383 TA

Advisor Master Programming Guide 187

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R155 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
38 24 Hour 156 Alarm E156 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R156 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
39 24 Hour 157 Alarm E157 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R157 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
40 24 Hour 158 Alarm E158 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R158 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
41 24 Hour 159 Alarm E159 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R159 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
42 24 Hour 161 Alarm E161 QA
Tamper E383 TA
Inhibit E570 QB
Alarm restore R161 QR
Tamper Restore R383 TR
Inhibit Restore R570 QU
Fire 43 Fire Supervisory 200 Alarm E200 FA
supervisory
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB

188 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
Alarm restore R200 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
44 Fire Supervisory 201 Alarm E201 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R201 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
45 Fire Supervisory 202 Alarm E202 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R202 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
46 Fire Supervisory 203 Alarm E203 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R203 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
47 Fire Supervisory 204 Alarm E204 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R204 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU
48 Fire Supervisory 205 Alarm E205 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R205 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU

Advisor Master Programming Guide 189

Class Type No Sub-class Condition CID SIA
49 Fire Supervisory 206 Alarm E206 FA
Tamper E383 FT
Inhibit E570 FB
Alarm restore R206 FR
Tamper Restore R383 FJ
Inhibit Restore R570 FU

The list of system events depends on the selection of the protocol type being
large or small. The small protocols only report summarised events. The large
format reports as much as possible (see Table 15 and Table 16).
Table 15 and Table 16 show a list of events to be reported split up to Contact ID
and SIA. Contact ID reports most events separately. Contact ID not only reports
the event and the point or user, but also the area. SIA reporting does not. SIA
also uses an offset to events reported from DGPs (+300) or RASs (+400).

Table 15: Overview of small reporting format

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
Duress Code Entered (Any Code No) E120 00 C 008 HA C 401–464
Duress Code Restored R120 00 C 008 HR C 401–464
Area Armed C402 01–16 U 001–999 CL U 001–999
Area Disarmed O402 01–16 U 001–999 OP U 001–999
RAS Offline (Any RAS No) E143 00 C 001 ET 000
RAS Online (Any RAS No) R143 00 C 001 ER 000
DGP Offline (Any DGP No) E143 00 C 002 ET 000
DGP Online (Any DGP No) R143 00 C 002 ER 000
DGP Mains Failure (Any DGP No) E301 00 C 004 AT 000
DGP Mains Restore (Any DGP No) R301 00 C 004 AR 000
DGP Battery Low (Any DGP No) E302 00 C 005 YT 000
DGP Battery Restore (Any DGP No) R302 00 C 005 YR 000
DGP Fuse Failure – – – ET 000
DGP Fuse Restore – – – ER 000
DGP Siren Monitor Fail (Any DGP No) E320 00 C 007 TA 000
DGP Siren Monitor Restore (Any DGP No) R320 00 C 007 TR 000
DGP Tamper (Any DGP No) E145 00 C 006 TA 000
DGP Tamper Restore (Any DGP No) R145 00 C 006 TR 000
DGP 16 CPU Restart E305 00 C 003 – –
RAS Tamper (Any RAS No) – – – TA 000
RAS Tamper Restore (Any RAS No) – – – TR 000

190 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
Area Out of Timezone E608 00 C 012 OK 000
Area Within Timezone R608 00 C 012 – –
Film Out E150 00 C 011 – –
Film Out Restore R150 00 C 011 – –
Emergency Alarm E102 00 C 009 QA 000
Auto Test Call E602 00 C 016 RP 000
Service Requested E411 00 C 013 YX 000
Line Fault Monitor Fail E351 00 C 014 LT connection
type [1]
Line Fault Monitor Restored R351 00 C 014 LR connection
type [1]
Direct Connect via J15 Port E416 00 C 010 – –
Program Mode Entered E150 00 C 015 LB 000
Program Mode Exited R150 00 C 015 LS 000
Emergency Alarm (Dead Man’s Alarm) R628 00 C 009
Engineering Reset Ok IR 1-999 (user)
Engineering Reset Required IA 1st Area
Engineer Walk Test - Started TS -
Engineer Walk Test - Failed WF -
Engineer Walk Test - Completed WP -
Fire long supervision fault BZ [D] 001–256
TA [A]
Fire long supervision restore BJ [D] 001–256
TR [A]
Sensor battery low XT 001–256
Sensor battery restore XR 001–256
Fire detector “Clean Me” signal AS 001–256
Fire detector “Clean Me” restore AN 001–256
RF DGP jamming fault XQ [D] 000
TA [A]
RF DGP jamming restore XH [D] 000
TR [A]
Anti-Mask BT 001–256
Anti-Mask Restore BR 001–256
Fault BT 001–256
Fault Restore BR 001–256
Battery Fail YT 301–316
Battery Restore YR 301–316
PSU Fail YT 301–316

Advisor Master Programming Guide 191

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
PSU Restore YR 301–316

[D] Disarmed state

[A] Armed state
[1] Connection type is described in “Connection type” on page 100.

Table 16: Overview of large reporting format

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
Duress Code Entered E120 00 C 001–064 HA C 401–464
Duress Code Restored R120 00 C 001–064 HR C 401–464
Area Armed C402 01–16 U 001–999 CL U 001–999
Area Disarmed O402 01–16 U 001–999 OP U 001–999
RAS Offline E143 00 C 001–064 ET C 401–464
RAS Online R143 00 C 001–064 ER C 401–464
DGP Offline E143 00 C 065–079 ET C 301–316
DGP Online R143 00 C 065–079 ER C 301–316
DGP Mains Failure E301 00 C 065–080 AT C 301–316
DGP Mains Restore R301 00 C 065–080 AR C 301–316
DGP Battery Low E302 00 C 065–080 YT C 301–316
DGP Battery Restore R302 00 C 065–080 YR C 301–316
DGP Fuse Failure E300 00 C 065–080 ET C 317–332
DGP Fuse Restore R300 00 C 065–080 ER C 317–332
DGP Siren Monitor Fail E320 00 C 065–080 TA C 317–332
DGP Siren Monitor Restore R320 00 C 065–080 TR C 317–332
DGP Tamper E145 00 C 065–080 TA C 301–316
DGP Tamper Restore R145 00 C 065–080 TR C 301–316
DGP Battery Test Start E608 00 C 065–080 – –
DGP Battery Test Finish R608 00 C 065–080 – –
DGP Battery Test Fail E309 00 C 065–080 YT C 301–316
DGP Battery Test Restore R309 00 C 065–080 YR C 301–316
DGP CPU Restart E305 00 C 065–080 RR C 301–316
DGP Encryption Error E303 00 C 065–080 – –
DGP DIP Switch Changed E304 00 C 065–080 – –
DGP De-Polled E330 00 C 065–080 ET C 333–348
DGP Polled R330 00 C 065–080 ER C 333–348
DGP Isolated E570 00 C 065–080 UB C 301–316
DGP De-Isolated R570 00 C 065–080 UU C 301–316
RAS Tamper E137 00 C 001–064 TA C 401–464

192 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
RAS Tamper Restore R137 00 C 001–064 TR C 401–464
RAS Code Attempts E145 00 C 001–064 JA C 401–464
RAS CPU Restart E305 00 C 001–064 RR C 401–464
RAS Encryption Error E303 00 C 001–064 – –
RAS DIP Switch Changed E304 00 C 001–064 – –
RAS De-Polled E330 00 C 001–064 – –
RAS Polled R330 00 C 001–064 – –
RAS Isolated E570 00 C 001–064 UB C 401–464
RAS De-Isolated R570 00 C 001–064 UU C 401–464
Area Out of Timezone E608 00 C 160–175 OK 000
Area Within Timezone R608 00 C 160–175 – –
Film Low E150 00 129 – –
Film Out E150 00 130 – –
Film Out Restore R150 00 130 – –
Restart Exit timer E150 00 131 –
Emergency Alarm E102 00 143 QA 000
Camera Pop Enabled R570 00 133 – –
Camera Pop Disabled E570 00 133 – –
Disarm Test Started E150 00 134 – –
Disarm Test Over R150 00 134 – –
Disarm Test Failed E150 00 135 – –
Disarm Test Completed E150 00 136 – –
Arm Test Started E150 00 137 – –
Arm Test Over R150 00 137 – –
Arm Test Failed E150 00 138 WF 000
Arm Test Completed E150 00 139 WP 000
Delay Button Active E150 00 140 – –
Line Down E150 00 128 – –
Line Up E150 00 128 – –
Network Down E150 00 128 – –
Auto Reset E150 00 141 – –
Time Changed E150 00 142 JT U 001–999
Auto Test Call E602 00 000 RP 000
Ring-In Test Call E602 00 144 – –
Service In E150 00 145 – –
Service Out R150 00 145 – –
Service Requested E411 00 000 YX 000

Advisor Master Programming Guide 193

Description Contact ID SIA
Event Area Pt/User Event Pt/User
Line Fault Monitor Fail E351 00 000 LT connection
type [1]
Line Fault Monitor Restored R351 00 000 LR connection
type [1]
Spare E416 00 147 – –
Management Software Connected E416 00 147 RB 000
Direct Connect via J15 Port E416 00 147 – –
Remote/Direct Disconnection R146 00 147 RS 000
Program Mode Entered E150 00 146 LB 000
Program Mode Exited R150 00 146 LS 000
Film Low Restored R150 00 129 – –
MonCo Commanded Panel E422 00 000 RB 000
MonCo Commanded Panel Restore R422 00 000 RS 000
Recent Closing E459 CR area, user
Swinger Trouble E377 BD area, zone
Fire long supervision fault BZ [D] 001–256
TA [A]
Fire long supervision restore BJ [D] 001–256
TR [A]
Sensor battery low XT 001–256
Sensor battery restore XR 001–256
Fire detector “Clean Me” signal AS 001–256
Fire detector “Clean Me” restore AN 001–256
RF DGP jamming fault XQ [D] 301–315
TA [A]
RF DGP jamming restore XH [D] 301–315
TR [A]
Anti-Mask BT 001–256
Anti-Mask Restore BR 001–256
Fault BT 001–256
Fault Restore BR 001–256
Battery Fail YT 301–316
Battery Restore YR 301–316
PSU Fail YT 301–316
PSU Restore YR 301–316

[D] Disarmed state

[A] Armed state
[1] Connection type is described in “Connection type” on page 100.

194 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Troubleshooting

ATS control panel - model ATS1000/2000/3000/4000/4500

Condition Possible cause
The master LCD arming station (RAS The system databus line may be connected incorrectly.
address 1) has all LEDs flashing and
The address links on the RAS may be incorrectly set.
displays the “System Fault” message.
The panel is not communicating with The system databus line may be connected incorrectly.
arming stations and/or data gathering
RAS and/or DGP numbers to be polled may not be
panels.
programmed, or may not match the addresses set on
the units.
Earth loop in cabling.
The arming stations and/or data The system databus line may be connected incorrectly.
gathering panels appear to be going off-
The termination may be incorrect. TERM links may not
line and on-line (indicated by RAS/DGP
have been removed where necessary. See Advisor
fail LEDs.
Master Installation Guide, “Cabling”
Zone goes into alarm while the area is The zone is wired incorrectly causing a tamper
disarmed. condition (open circuit or short circuit) instead of active
condition. EOL. resistors may be installed incorrectly.
See the wiring diagrams in the installation guide.
Unable to assign alarm groups when No alarm groups have been programmed with the
programming Users. option “Can this alarm group be assigned to users” set
to Yes.
If a code other than the Master User code (User 1) is
being used to access “Program Users”, the alarm
group assigned to it may not allow the function.
See “5-Alarm groups” on page 50.
Panel is not reporting to central station The telephone line connections may be wired
incorrectly. See wiring diagrams in Advisor Master
Installation Guide.
The central station receiver does not support the
programmed protocol.
The account number in Programming menu 9 may be
programmed incorrectly.
Phone number 1 must be programmed.
No central station is programmed to report the event.
See “1-Zone database” on page 7 and “2-Area
database” on page 29.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 195

LCD arming stations - models ATS1100, ATS1105
Condition Possible cause
All the LEDs on the arming The dipswitches may be incorrectly set (the address set on the
station are flashing. arming station may be incorrect and therefore polling to the
arming station is not being acknowledged).
The system databus line may be connected incorrectly.
The arming station is not being polled (it may not have been
included in arming stations to be polled when programming
arming stations).
LEDs do not appear to be The arming station type may have been defined incorrectly:
indicating the correct condition.
LCD arming station must be set to Yes.
The arming station appears to The termination may be incorrect. See Advisor Master
be going off-line and on-line Installation Guide, “Cabling”.
(indicated by the "RAS Fail"
message on the LCD).
An error is indicated when a An invalid PIN may have been used.
code is entered on the keypad
The arming station may not have been programmed with an
(seven beeps).
alarm group.
The alarm group of the PIN may not permit access at this
arming station.

4 LED arming station - models ATS1150 and ATS1155

Condition Possible cause
All the LEDs on the arming The dipswitches may be incorrectly set (the address set on the
station are flashing. arming station may be incorrect and therefore polling to the
arming station is not being acknowledged).
The system databus line may be connected incorrectly.
The arming station is not being polled (it may not have been
included in arming stations to be polled when programming
arming stations).
LEDs do not appear to be The arming station type may have been defined incorrectly as
indicating the correct condition. LCD arming station. This option must be set to No.
The arming station appears to The termination may be incorrect. See Advisor Master
be going off-line and on-line Installation Guide, “Cabling”.
(indicated by the "RAS Fail"
message on a LCD arming
station).
The arming station appears to The relay probably does not have a reverse diode across it to
lockup when the relay, which it protect against back EMF.
controls via the OUT terminal,
activates.
An error is indicated when a An invalid PIN may have been used.
code is entered on the keypad
The arming station may not have been programmed with an
(seven beeps).
alarm group.
The alarm group of the PIN may not permit access at this
arming station.

196 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Data gathering panels - models ATS1201, ATS1210,
ATS1211, ATS1220
Condition Possible cause
The "Tx" LED on the data The dipswitches may be incorrectly set (the address recorded
gathering panel is not flashing. on the DGP may be incorrect and therefore polling to the DGP
is not being acknowledged).
The system databus cable may be connected incorrectly.
The data gathering panel is not programmed to be polled.
"Tx" and "Rx" LED’s are not No power or low power.
operating.
The system databus cable may be connected incorrectly or the
power supply is faulty (mains or battery).
The data gathering panel The termination may be incorrect. See Advisor Master
appears to be going off-line and Installation Guide, “Cabling”.
on-line (indicated by "DGP Fail"
on a LCD arming station).
Some or all DGP zones are The zone numbers for the DGP have been calculated
permanently in tamper (or incorrectly, and zone type numbers have therefore been
permanently in alarm if "Dual assigned to the wrong zones in the zone database. See the
zone” on page 73 is set to No). installation guide on “zones and outputs allocated to each
DGP”.
The EOL resistors are wrong or the wrong resistor value is
programmed in “7-System options” (page 70).
There is a problem with wiring the zones. To check the voltage
or resistor values, see Advisor Master Installation Guide.
The ATS1202 expansion module(s) (if fitted) have the
dipswitches incorrectly set.
Expansion module: 1st 2nd 3rd
Dipswitch 1 ON OFF OFF
Dipswitch 2 OFF ON OFF
Dipswitch 3 OFF OFF ON
Dipswitch 4 not used
Two or three ATS1202 Dipswitch A on the DGP has not been set to ON.
expansion modules are fitted to
increase the DGP to 24 or 32
zones, but the 17th to 32nd
zones on the DGP do not seem
to function.
Four-way relay module(s) Dipswitch B on the DGP is set to ON (dipswitch B should only
(ATS1810) being used with the be ON if 8-way relay (ATS1811) modules or 16 open collector
DGP do not function, but some modules (ATS1820) are being used).
of the LED’s on the module
appear to be permanently on.
8-way relay modules Dipswitch B on the DGP has not been set to ON.
(ATS1811) or 16-way open
collector modules (ATS1820)
connected to the DGP do not
function.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 197

Condition Possible cause
The siren output (with 8 Ohm The address setting for this data gathering panel is 15. The
siren speaker connected) does siren can not be addressed as the highest output number is
not operate when it is meant to. 255 where 256 would be required.
The 16th (last) relay number associated with the DGP address
has not been mapped to a siren event flag number. See:
• “16-Event to output” on page 124
• “2-Area database” on page 29
Zones and outputs allocated to each DGP (installation guide)

Serial printer interface - model ATS1802

Condition Possible cause
No printout The printer output or the selected events may not have been enabled,
or the timezone selected for printing may not be valid in menu “30-
Printer” on page 148.
The baud rate and parity options selected in menu “30-Printer” on page
148 may not match the options set in the printer.
The cable from ATS1802 port B to the printer may be wired incorrectly.
Check it against the installation guide.
The wrong type of cable may have been used or the cable may have
been run too far. Four or six core RS232 shielded data cable must be
used and should not be longer than 15 metres.
The printer is not providing a Data Terminal Ready signal (+8 to +11V
DC) to the CTS input on the ATS1802 Port B (check with the meter and
check the connection between printer serial connector, pin 20 "DTR"
and ATS1802 port B, "CTS").
The serial printer may not be set up correctly.
Print-out is garbled or The Baud rate and parity options selected in menu “30-Printer” on page
misaligned etc. 148 may not match the options set in the printer.
The printer is not compatible with the Epson printer codes for
condensed and enhanced printing (SI, DC2, S0 and DC4).

Output devices - models ATS1810, ATS1811, ATS1820

Condition Possible cause
The 8-way relay card (ATS1811)
will not function:
When connected to the ATS panel. The “No. of output controllers” on page 71 has not been
set.
Note: Number of output controllers = 1 for each 8-way
relay card.
When connected to a DGP. DIP switch B has not been set to ON.

198 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Condition Possible cause
16-way open collector card
(ATS1820) will not function:
When connected to the Challenger The “No. of output controllers” on page 71 has not been
Panel. set.
Note: Number of output controllers = 2 for each 16-way
open collector.
When connected to a DGP. DIP switch B has not been set to ON.
4-way relay card(s)(ATS1810) will
not function:
When connected to the ATS panel. The “No. of output controllers” on page 71 has not been set
to 0.
When connected to a DGP. DIP switch B has not been set to OFF.
Relays will not function after The relay has not been mapped to an event flag or the
being enabled as above relay/output number has been calculated incorrectly and
therefore is not programmed as the correct output number.
The output is being held inactive during a timezone.
The cable has been connected incorrectly.
See:
• Event to output – Numbering, Zones/ DGPs/ Relays.
• Hardware installation guides supplied with the
relay/output cards.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 199

Options required by EN 50131 compliance
The following options and values are mandatory for EN 50131-1 Grade 3
regulations.
• “Entry time” on page 30: ≤ 45 s
• “Reset from RAS without code” on page 44: No
• “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44: Yes
• “Timed lockout by wrong badges” on page 47: Yes
• “External siren set to” on page 65: 90 s to 15 min
• “Internal siren set to” on page 65: 90 s to 15 min
• “Siren delay set to” on page 66: ≤ 10 min
• “Mains fail delay time” on page 66: 60 s
• “Delay reporting alarms for” on page 66: ≤ 10 s
• “Screensaver timeout time” on page 67: ≤ 60 s
• “RAS card & PIN timeout” on page 67: 30 s
• “Abort time (sec)” on page 68: 30 s
• “RAS lockout time” on page 68: ≥ 90 s
• “Areas selected for total disarm” on page 70: 0
• “Test mode” on page 71: 0, No test
• “Dual zone” on page 73: Yes
• “Auto uninhibit on disarm” on page 73: Yes
• “System alarms set siren and strobe” on page 74: Yes
• “Latching system alarms” on page 74: Yes
• “Disable code from displaying” on page 76: Yes
• “Sirens only after FTC” on page 77: No
• “Inhibit zone tamper” on page 79: Yes
• “Report multiple alarms” on page 79: Yes
• “Report multiple restores” on page 79: No
• “Ignore battery fault when arming” on page 80: No
• “User can do engineering reset” on page 80: No
• “Engineer entry protect” on page 80: No
• “Send arming after exit” on page 81: Yes
• “End of line resistor code” on page 81: 1, 4k7
• If “Duress mode” on page 81 is set to Increment digit, use minimum 6 digits
PIN codes
• “Siren Type” on page 82: 1, Constant DC Voltage
• “Inhibit alarm report on exit fault” on page 82: Yes
• “Disable tamper report in disarm” on page 82: No
• “Inhibit ext.sir&strobe for disarm tamper” on page 83: Yes
• “ATS system code” on page 83: 00000
• “ACPO” on page 83: No
• “EE confirm disable (ACPO)” on page 83: No
• “Engineer reset on ACPO zone B alarm” on page 84: No
• “NFA2P” on page 84: No
• “Installer dual code” on page 84“: Yes
• “Enable buzzer on mains/line fault” on page 85: No
• “Scandinavian indicators” on page 85: Yes

200 Advisor Master Programming Guide

• “Enable log limitations” on page 85: Yes
• “Confirm area” on page 86: None
• “Indicate inhibited zones” on page 86: Yes
• “Eng Rst on ACPO zone B tamper” on page 86: No
• “Eng Rst on ACPO system B tamper” on page 86: No
• “Security grade” on page 86: 3 (Med to High Risk)
• “Ignore AC mains fault when arming” on page 87: No
• “Latch mains/battery/line faults” on page 87: Yes
• “Enable PA siren on FTC” on page 87: No
• “Latch AWDGP jam and supervision” on page 87: No
• “Prevent arming on faults” on page 89: Yes
• “Authorize computer connection” on page 147: Yes
• “Battery test frequency” on page 150: Every day
• “56-Siren calibration” on page 178: values are calculated
Note: The options above can be set automatically by applying Grade 3 defaults.
See “14-Defaults” on page 116 for more information. Sirens must be calibrated
separately. See “Siren calibration” on page 6 for more details.
The following features are not allowed (not evaluated):
• Keyswitch zone types to set and unset the system. See “Zone type” en page
7.
• Presetting indication and any automatic override of set prevention.
Refer to Table 17 below for all supported options for notification requirements.

Table 17: EN 50131-1 2006 options

Notification equipment Grade 3 options
A B C D
Remotely powered audible WD 2 Optional Optional Optional
Self-powered audible WD Optional 1 Optional Optional
Main ATS ATS 4 ATS 4 ATS 4 ATS 5
Additional ATS Optional Optional ATS 3 Optional

The key variations of cards and keys are the following:

Both
• ATS1471 (1 pc.) and ATS1477 (10 pcs.) tags as well as
• ATS1475 (10 pcs.) card badges
have a number of key variations of 67 million minimum.
Both make use of 26 bit (to 48 bit) Hitag protocol.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 201

RAS options required by EN 50131
compliance
Each arming scenario described below meets EN 50131 requirements.

Using PIN only

• “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44: Yes

Using Card and PIN

• “Cards auto disarm” on page 43: No
• “Card always arms/disarms” on page 43: No
• “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44: Yes
• “Cards arm after 3 badges” on page 45: No
• “Card & PIN (always)” on page 46: Yes
• “Timed lockout by wrong badges” on page 47: Yes
• “RAS card & PIN timeout” on page 67: 30 s

Using card only

• “Cards auto disarm” on page 43: No
• “Card always arms/disarms” on page 43: No
If set to Yes, set “Cards arm after 3 badges” on page 45 to No.
• “Timed lockout by wrong codes” on page 44: Yes
• “Cards arm after 3 badges” on page 45: Yes
• “Card & PIN (always)” on page 46: No
• “Timed lockout by wrong badges” on page 47: Yes
See also the appropriate RAS manual for more details.

202 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Additional functions
The following settings are default. Modifying these settings has no influence on
EN 50131 compliance.
• “Film low level” on page 70: 800
• “Film out level” on page 71: 1100
• “No. of output controllers” on page 71: 0
• “Zone event text” en page 72: 0000
• “Alarm code prefix” en page 72: 0
• “LCD rotation delay” on page 72: 0
• “LCD rotation speed” on page 73: 0
• “Display one zone at a time” on page 74: Yes
• “Username file” on page 74: Yes
• “Siren testing” on page 75: No
• “Disable "0, ENTER" for camera reset” on page 75: Yes
• “Disable insert of AG restriction” on page 75: No
• “Disable flashing area LEDs” on page 76: No
• “Two users before programming code” on page 76: No
• “Display alarms instantly on LCD” on page 77: Yes
• “Financial options” on page 77: No
• “Display user flags” on page 78: No
• “Delayed disarmed alarm lockout” on page 78: No
• “Zone expansion fitted” on page 78: No
• “Engineer reset for system alarms” on page 79: No
• “Engineer reset for system tampers” on page 80: Yes
• “User offset” on page 81: 0
• “Soak test days” on page 83: 7
• “Enable "Call Central Station" display” on page 85: Yes
• “Synchronize DGP users records” on page 88: Yes
• “Engineer reset on RAS lockout” on page 88: No
• “Override AC mains fail” on page 90: Yes
• “Override battery fault” on page 90: Yes
• “Override signalling fault” on page 90: Yes
• “Override siren fail” on page 90: Yes
• “Override detector trouble” on page 90: Yes
• “Override RAS fault” on page 91: Yes
• “Override DGP fault” on page 91: Yes
The installer (user level 3) commissions the system with appropriate additional
functions.
The end-user (user level 2) is able to make use of all these functions.
The Installer can only make use of these functions when he has an access
granted by end-user.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 203

Additional zone types
The following zone types are additional and have no influence on EN 50131
compliance.
7. Camera Suspicion Zone 44. Firedoor with AlmGrp Restr.
15. Firedoor 45. (Event Flag/Arm.Alm) Restr.
20. Zone to Event Flag 24Hr 46. Disarm Alm/Arm Gen. Alm
21. Firedoor With User Code 47. Dis. Alm Susp/Arm Gen. Alm
23. Camera 1 Count 48. Camera 1 Film Out
24. Camera 2 Count 49. Camera 2 Film Out
25. Camera 3 Count 50. Camera 3 Film Out
26. Camera 4 Count 51. Camera 4 Film Out
27. Technical with Report 52. Camera 5 Film Out
30. Firedoor with Reset 53. Camera 6 Film Out
32. Armed Zone to Event Flag 54. Camera 7 Film Out
36. Camera 5 Count 55. Camera 8 Film Out
37. Camera 6 Count 56. Firedoor if No TZ 41
38. Camera 7 Count 57. Technical Report & Screen
39. Camera 8 Count 58. Technical Screen
41. Entry/Exit Firedoor 67. Latched detector
42. Entry/Exit Firedoor w Code 70. Keybox
43. Disarm Zone to Event Flag 71. Lock monitor

The following zone types are additional and are not certified — do not use in
EN 50131 certified systems.
6. Pulsed Keyswitch 33. 24Hr Alarm & Inhibit
8. Dis. delay/Arm Gen. Alm 34. Area Dis/AlmGrp Restr. Arm
9. Reset Delayed Zones 35. Area AlmGrp Restr Arm Only
11. Dis. Delay Alarm 40. Dis. Susp. Delay/Arm Alm
12. Restart Exit Timer 59. 24 Hour Alarm If No TZ 41
16. 24Hr Local Mains Fail 65. Engineering reset switch
22. Dis. Delay Reset/Arm Alm 72. GVE zone
28. Armed Alarm with Reset 73, 74. Request to arm / disarm
29. 24-Hour Alarm with Reset 76. VdS tamper zone
31. Latching Keyswitch

204 Advisor Master Programming Guide

EN 50131 Grade 3 certified components
The ATS Classic EN Grade 3 system exists out the following components.

Intrusion control panels

ATS21xxE 8 to 64 zone integrated security panel with 3 A PSU, small enclosure, EN 50131
Grade 3
ATS34xxE 8 to 128 zone integrated security panel with 3 A PSU, medium enclosure,
EN 50131 Grade 3
ATS46xxE 16 to 256 zone integrated security panel with 3 A PSU, large enclosure, EN 50131
Grade 3

Keypads / readers (RAS, remote arming station)

Panel can support up to 8 or 16 RAS devices at the same time, depending on
intrusion panel, regardless of type (independent of other expanders).

ATS1100 Keypad, 2x16 small LCD keypad, no card reader interface

ATS1105 Keypad, 2x16 small LCD keypad, with card reader interface
ATS1110 ATS 16 area keypad, 2x16 characters LCD display
ATS1111 ATS 16 area keypad, 4x16 characters LCD display
ATS1115 ATS 16 area keypad, 2x16 characters LCD display with built-in card reader
ATS1116 ATS 16 area keypad, 4x16 characters LCD display with built-in card reader

Remote expanders (DGP, data gathering panel)

Panel can support up to 7 or 15 DGP devices, depending on intrusion panel,
regardless of type (independent of other expanders).

ATS1201E 8 to 32 zone DGP expander with 3 A PSU, small enclosure, EN 50131 Grade 3
ATS1203E 8 to 32 zone DGP expander with 3 A PSU, medium enclosure, EN 50131 Grade 3
ATS1204E 8 to 32 zone DGP expander with 3 A PSU, large enclosure, EN 50131 Grade 3
ATS1210E 8 to 16 zone DGP expander, no PSU, small plastic enclosure, EN 50131 Grade 3
ATS1210LE 8 to 16 zone DGP expander, no PSU, medium plastic enclosure, EN 50131
Grade 3
ATS1211E 8 to 16 zone DGP expander, no PSU, small steel enclosure, EN 50131 Grade 3

Isolators / repeaters
ATS LAN bus can make use of 3 isolator/repeaters in series (maximum cable
length can be extended from 1.5 to 6 km).

ATS1740 Data bus isolator/repeater

ATS1744 Quadruple Data bus isolator (functional isolator for area separation)

Advisor Master Programming Guide 205

I/O expanders
Panel and DGP can support up to 3 I/O devices depending on the type.

ATS1202 Plug in 8-zone expander

ATS1810 4 way relay board
ATS1811 8 way relay board
ATS1820 16 way open collector board
ATS1821 8 way open collector board

Reporting devices
Panel can support 1 GSM device connected onto MI bus.

ATS7310 GSM Communication Device ATS

ATS1801+ATS1809 IP interface

When any option, any additional function or any additional zone type in this
section does not comply with the EN 50131 requirements, the EN 50131 Grade 3
label must be removed from the system. Refer to “EN 50131 compliance
precautions” in Advisor Master Installation Guide.

206 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Glossary

Access control The control of entry to, or exit from, a security area.
Active See Normal/Active/Tamper/Inhibited
Alarm The state of a security system when a device connected to a zone is
activated and the condition of the area is such that activation should be
signalled. E.g. a door lock is broken, causing a siren to sound.
Alarm group Alarm groups define the options available to users, arming stations or
door reader to allow alarm control. Alarm groups are defined by a set of
areas, alarm control functions and menu options.
Zone types for area control (keyswitches) also make use of alarm
groups.
Alarm group restriction An alarm group restriction can be assigned to an alarm group to enable
different types of user to:
• Use timed disarm option for certain area(s)
• Restrict alarm control to “Arm/reset only” on certain area(s) or
• Utilise the “User Count” or “Emergency” function.
Alarm reporting A procedure to transmit alarm events or other events to a central station
by means of a dialler and a set of rules called a protocol.
Alarm control The control over alarm functions.
Area A section of a premise which has specific security requirements. The
ATS system allows any premise to be divided into 16 areas of different
security requirements. Each area has its own zones. Each area is
identified by a number and a name. E.g. Area 1 Office, Area 2
Workshop, Area 3 Boardroom, etc.
Armed The condition of an area where a change in the status of any zone (from
normal to active) causes an alarm. An area or premise is only armed
when it is unoccupied. Some zones (like vaults) can remain armed
continually.
Armed The condition of an area or premise when it is armed (security turned
on) and unoccupied.
Arming stations (RAS) A device that is the user’s control panel for security functions for an
area(s) or for access points (doors). The arming station can be an ATS
console (LCD keypad, reader) or any other device that can be used to
perform security function, such as arm/disarm, open doors, etc.
Burglar alarm An alarm triggered by a security device like a PIR or door contact,
indicating someone has entered without authorised access.
Central station A company that monitors whether an alarm has occurred in a security
system. A central station is located away from the premise/area it
monitors.
Control panel An electronic device that is used to gather all data from zones on the
premises. Depending on programming and status of areas, it will
generate alarm signals. If required, alarms and other events can be
reported to a central station.
Cursor A flashing underline character on the liquid crystal display (LCD) that
indicates where the next character entered on the keypad will appear.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 207

DGP Data Gathering Panel. A device that collects data from other security
devices within an area, and transfers it to the ATS control panel or four-
door/four-lift DGP.
Dialler An electronic device that allows the ATS system to transmit alarms and
other events to a central station. Can also be used to perform
up/download.
Disarmed The condition of an area when it is occupied and when the security
system has been set so that normal activity does not set off an alarm.
Door contact A magnetic contact used to detect if a door or window is opened.
Door control The control over door functions.
Door group An ATS feature that assigns a group of doors or lifts to a user, in order
to allow access to those doors/lifts. Access to each door in a group can
be restricted via a timezone.
DUAL Dual detector. A security device used to detect intruders in a certain part
of an area or premise. The technique used is based on two techniques
like PIR and RADAR or PIR and Ultrasonic.
Duress A situation where a user is being forced to breach the system security
(e.g. forced at gunpoint to open the door). The ATS duress facility
allows a signal to be activated (e.g. notification to a central station) by
the user. This is done by entering a duress digit in conjunction with a
PIN.
Engineer Personnel from an installer that is able to install and service the control
panel.
Event flags A signal activated by a zone condition, area condition, system status or
fault condition, door command (on doors 1 to 16) or shunt condition. The
main purpose of an event flag is to activate an output.
Fire alarm An alarm triggered by fire or smoke detectors indicating a fire.
Floor group An ATS feature that assigns a group of floors to a user, in order to allow
selection of floors when accessing a lift reader. Access to each floor in a
group can be restricted via a timezone.
Floor control See Door control.
History A list of past alarm and access control events stored in memory that can
be viewed on an LCD arming station or sent to a printer.
Hold-up A (silent) alarm that is triggered by a hold-up button. Normally it will not
trigger any siren, only send a message to a central station.
Inhibit See Normal/Active/Tamper/Inhibited
Installer A company that installs and services security equipment.
Keypad A remote arming station with keys to input data (keypad). Used to
program the control panel, perform user functions, view alarms, etc.
Keyswitch A device using a switch to arm or disarm areas. The switch needs a key
to switch.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display. The part of an arming station where messages
are displayed.
LED Light Emitting Diode. A light indicator on an arming station which
conveys a condition. E.g.; area in alarm, communication fault, etc.

208 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Local alarm An alarm that is signalled only within a premise and occurs when an
area is occupied. The circumstances that cause a local alarm can be
checked and rectified by personnel on site and it is therefore
unnecessary for the alarm to be reported to a central station.
Logic equation A logic expression that combines macro inputs in a specific manner.
The result of a logic equation is called a macro output.
Macro input An event flag or an output that is used in a logic equation. Each macro
input is an event flag or output.
Macro logic program A set of rules that is created by macro inputs, logic equations and macro
outputs that is used to trigger event flags or zones.
Macro output A macro output holds the result of a logic equation. The macro output
can have a timing element. Macro outputs trigger event flags or zones.
Normal / Active / Describes the condition of a zone.
Tamper / Inhibited
• Normal: The zone is NOT activated. E.g. Fire Exit Door closed
• Active: The zone is activated. E.g. Fire Exit Door open
• Tamper: The zone is open or short circuited. Someone may have
tried to tamper the security device.
• Inhibited: The zone has been inhibited from indicating normal or
active status. It is excluded from functioning as part of the system.
Nuisance alarm An alarm that is triggered by a security device, without any burglar. It
could be caused by open windows, pets or incorrect projection of
security equipment.
Online / offline Operational/non-operational. A device may be offline due to a
malfunction in the device itself or it may be disconnected from the
control.
Output controller A PCB module that connects to the ATS control panel or a DGP to
provide relay or open collector outputs. When programming, 1 Output
controller equals 8 outputs.
Override A procedure, which allows you to review and confirm particular
conditions that normally prevent arming, for example, a battery fault.
The confirmation makes the arming possible, if an overriding is allowed
for the particular condition.
PIN A 4-10 digit number given to, or selected by, a user. It is necessary to
enter a PIN on an ATS keypad as a pre-requisite to perform most ATS
functions. In the ATS programming the PIN is associated with a user
number which identifies the PIN holder to the system.
PIR Passive Infra Red detector. A security device used to detect intruders in
a certain part of an area or premise. The technique used is based on
infrared detection.
Poll An inquiry message continually sent by the ATS control panel to DGPs
and arming stations. Polling allows the remote unit to transfer data to
the control panel.
RAS Remote Arming Station. See Arming station.
Reader A device used for access control that can read cards to allow access.
Depending on the needs and the type of cards, the reader can for
example be a magnetic swipe reader or proximity reader.
Reporting See alarm reporting.

Advisor Master Programming Guide 209

Request to Exit zone A zone that is programmed to activate a door event flag. E.g. a button
provided inside a door (request to exit button) to allow users to exit
without using the door reader. Request To Exit is often abbreviated to
RTE.
Shunt A procedure that automatically inhibits a zone from generating an alarm
when it is activated. E.g. shunts stop a door generating an alarm when
opened for a short time.
Tamper A situation where a zone, an arming station, control panel, DGP or
associated wiring are tampered with, or accidentally damaged. The ATS
tamper facility activates a signal when tamper occurs.
Tamper alarms from zones are called zone tampers.
Timezone A program setting which identifies specific time periods on specific days.
Timezones are allocated to ATS functions to control the activity of that
function by time and day and are primary used to restrict access. E.g.
automatically arm or disarm areas or open doors.
Up/Download A protocol providing means to view the status of an ATS system or
change parameters in the system either local or remote.
User Anybody making use of the ATS system. Users are identified to the ATS
system by a unique number that is associated with the user’s PIN.
Zone An electrical signal from a security device (PIR detector, door contact) to
the ATS system. Each device is identified by a zone number and name.
E.g. 14 Reception Holdup Button, 6 Fire Exit Door.

210 Advisor Master Programming Guide

Index

2 operation of timed disarm and arm/reset,

119
200 baud reverse area armed/disarmed, 96 program alternate arm/reset, 123
program alternate timed disarm, 121
A program arm/reset, 120
abort time, 68 program timed disarm, 120
ACPO, 83 reporting emergency, 118
active zones used for counting, 118
arming with active zones, 55 used with auto arm/disarm, 126
Advanced Wireless DGP, 87 using vaults, 129
alarm control warning time, 63, 119
alarm group restrictions, 118 alarm groups, 50
arm with active zones, 55 accessing panel via dial-up modem, 56
auto arm/disarm, 126 activating keypad duress with a code, 53
cards always arm/disarm, 43 alarm group restrictions, 118
cards auto disarm, 43 alternate alarm groups, 60, 121
combining access control and alarm areas, 50
control, 72 arming and resetting only, 50
common areas, 130 arming station alarm group, 50
entry/exit, 7 assign restrictions, 56
entry/exit buzzers, 44 assigning an alarm group to a user, 52
entry/exit time, 29, 30 assigning areas, 52
forced arming, 55 assigning control functions, 52
latching system alarms, 74 assigning to arming stations, 39
lockout RAS on wrong codes, 44 auto inhibit active zones, 55
no alarm group restriction assigned, 119 auto reset alarms, 93
only using one key, 43 auto uninhibit on disarm, 73
operation of alarm group restriction with default settings for alarm groups, 51
arm/reset, 119 disabling auto uninhibit function, 54
operation of alarm group restriction with forced arming, 55
timed disarm, 118 important issues, 50
operation of alarm group restriction with name, 52
timed disarm and arm/reset, 119 no arming if no disarmed timer running, 57
reset alarm without PIN, 44 not available to user, 52
restrict to arm/reset, 54 number, 50
restrict to disarm, 54 only available at certain periods, 59
restrict to reset only, 54 prevent forced disarming, 55
unlock door, 42 program an alarm group, 50
when using cards, 41 reseting latching system alarms, 53
alarm group restrictions, 118 restrict alarm control to disarm only, 54
alarm groups, 50 restrict alarm control to reset only, 54
area disarmed time, 34 restricting alarm control to arm/reset, 54
assign to alarm groups, 56 restriction with emergency alarm, 57
disable auto insert, 75 restrictions only allow disarm on RAS, 44
disarmed time, 62, 119 restrictions operating as counter, 57
name, 120 show list of areas when arming/disarming,
no arming if no disarmed timer running, 57 53
no restriction assigned, 119 timed disarm, 50
number, 120 timezone, 59
only allow disarm on RAS, 44 timezones, 50
operation of arm/reset, 119 used to auto arm/disarm, 126
operation of restriction 7 - emergency, 119 user can override line fault, 61
operation of restriction 8 - counter, 119 user level, 60
operation of timed disarm, 118 user menu options, 59
what is an alarmgroup, 50

Advisor Master Programming Guide 211

 zone database, 21 arm/disarm timers
alarm-A event flag, 33 using restrictions with arm/disarm timers,
alarm-B event flag, 33 127
alarms arming prevent, 89
A to B alarm delay (ACPO), 66 arming without battery, 80
activate siren and strobe on system alarm, arming without mains, 87
74 ATS system code, 83
auto reset, 93 audible alert, 91
auto reset time, 93 audio listen in, 19, 34
disable flashing area LEDs, 76 audio listen in frame, 96
display alarms immediately, 77 audio listen in time, 96
latching system alarms, 74 authorize computer connection, 147
program local alarm reminder time, 64 auto arm/disarm, 126
reset latching system alarms, 53 number, 126
reset without using PIN, 44 postpone automatic arming, 127
silent alarms until fail to report, 77 program alarm group to use, 126
alert indicator event flag, 36 program timezone to use, 126
anti-mask detector, 28 auto reset, 93
anti-mask reset event flag, 33 alarm group, 93
anti-mask/fault event flag, 36 auto reset time, 93
area database, 29 automatic testing procedure for zones, 21
A&B reporting (ACPO), 35 AWDGP, 87
active event flag, 31
area name and number, 29 B
armed alarm event flag, 31
audio listen in, 34 battery fault
chime/camera event flag, 32 override, 90
disarmed alarm event flag, 31 battery testing, 150
disarmed event flag, 30 frequency, 150
disarmed time, 34 manually testing, 151
entry time event flag, 32 select battery test program, 150
entry/exit time, 29, 30 starting time, 150
exit fault reporting, 35 test period, 150
exit time event flag, 32 test report, 151
inhibit arming if all inhibited, 35 Bell 103 protocol, 146
inhibited alarm flag, 31 buzzer, 91
local alarm event flag, 31
number, 29 C
out of hours timezone, 34 calibration, 178
pre-alarm event flag, 32 camera
reporting, 34 film low level, 70
warning time event flag, 32 film out level, 71
area linking, 130 reset using 0, Enter, 75
using common areas, 130 suspicion time, 64
area tamper alarm event flag, 36 cards. See door control
areas. See area database second system code, 132
alarm groups, 50 system code, 131
area linking, 130 cards arm after 3 badges, 45
assigned to alarm groups, 52 challenge code, 89, 92
common areas, 20 change own PIN, 58
name and number, 29 channel mapping, 167
used as vaults, 129 chime, 87
zones, 20 enable on RAS, 47
areas assigned to vaults, 129 program an arming station, 40
arm complete event flag, 36 chime on RAS, 38
arm complete time, 67 chime time, 68
arm test class database, 164, See reporting
operation mode, 71 enable audio listen in for a condition, 165
test sirens, 75 explanation of reporting, 182
time to perform an arm test, 63 list of reporting classes, 182

212 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 select the class, 164 polling, 48
select the condition, 164 program four-door/four-lift DGP, 141
specify central station for condition to report troubleshooting, 197
to, 165 type of data panel, 49
code tamper, 44, 47 view poll errors, 138
event flag, 47 DGP fault
common area override, 91
programming, 20 dial tone detection, 94
zones, 20 diallers. See communication options
communication options, 94 disable part set B-alarms, 38
allow audio listen in, 99 disable tamper report in disarm, 82
dual reporting, 99 disarm complete event flag, 36
enable the line monitor, 95 disarm complete time, 68
MSN number, 94 disarm test
PABX number, 94 operation mode, 71
program account codes, 98 time to perform a disarm test, 63
program central station phone nbrs, 98 display card, 140
report inhibits, 99 door control
select reporting format for central station, alarm control with cards, 41
97 alarm control with one key, 43
select tone or pulse dialling, 95 cancel door event flag, 135
SIA reporting with 3 digit extensions, 95 cards always arm/disarm, 43
test calls, 166 cards auto disarm, 43
use Bell or CCITT for SIA, 99 display shunted zone, 43
computer access time, 68 door open command starts shunt, 134
computer connection, 142 door shunted when disarmed, 135
answering machine defeat, 146 door shunted while armed, 135
attempt to connect to computer, 146 Enter key operation, 42
authorization, 147 entry/exit shunting, 136
computer address, 145 output controller, 40
enable remote control, 143 overview of alarm control options, 41
enable remote up/download, 142 program an arming station, 40
number of calls before answering, 146 program the card ID offset, 131
program callback telephone number, 145 program the output to start the shunting,
program computer telephone number, 145 133
program service telephone number, 145 program the system code, 131
remote control if any area armed, 143 program the time to shunt, 134
report access control events to computer, program the warning time, 134
144 program zones to shunt, 133
report alarms to computer, 144 report door open/close, 136
rings before answering inccoming calls, 146 shunt event flag, 134
security password, 145 shunt timer number, 133
up/download if any area armed, 143 shunt warning event flag, 134
up/download using a modem, 144 system codes, 131
use Bell 103 protocol, 146 unlock door on alarm code, 42
confirm area, 86 unlock time, 65
connection type, 100 zone holds event flag for two seconds, 136
custom LCD message, 152 zone shunting, 133
customer text on LCD, 152 download to remote device, 139
indicating download status, 139
D selecting database, 139
dual zone, 73
data panels. See DGP database duress, 53, 81
detector fault event flag, 155
override, 90
DGP database, 48
E
battery testing, 150
DGP isolated event flag, 155 EE confirm disable (ACPO), 83
DGP offline event flag, 155 enable, 85
online/offline, 48 enable buzzer on mains/line fault, 85

Advisor Master Programming Guide 213

enable ISDN line fault monitor, 96 test mode, 156
enable log limitations, 85 triggering macros, 160
enable soak test, 20 warning time, 32
end-of-line resistors, 73 what are event flags, 179
engineer entry protect, 80 why use event flags, 179
engineer reset, 86, 88, 169 zone, 22
system alarms, 79 zone event if active, 25
system tampers, 80 event to output, 124
zone alarm, 19 event flag to link to output, 124
zone tamper, 19 event flags linked by default, 125
engineer reset on ACPO zone B alarm, 84 invert the output, 125
engineer walk test, 27, 175 output number, 124
engineering reset, 80 timezone, 125
entry/exit troubleshooting, 198
buzzer on RAS, 44 exit fault, 82, 92
delay reporting, 66 external siren event flag, 23
program time, 29, 30 external siren set to, 65
shunted entry/exit zone, 136
errors between ATS and units connected F
number detected, 138
event flags facility code. See system code
24 hr alarm 8, 25 factory defaults, 116
activated by zones, 22 financial options enabled, 77
active, 31 forced arming, 55
all areas armed, 156 forced disarm, 55
area disarmed, 30 four-door DGP
armed alarm, 24, 31 set type of DGP, 49
armed alarm 10, 25 four-lift DGP
armed alarm 11, 25 set type of DGP, 49
armed alarm 9, 25 free programmable text on LCD, 152
camera, 26, 32 frequently used detector, 22
chime, 26, 32, 40
code tamper, 47 G
DGP isolated, 155 glossary of terms, 209
DGP offline, 155 GSM line fault, 97
disarmed alarm, 25, 31
door event activation time, 65
I
door event flag, 40
duress, 155 ignore battery fault when arming, 80
entry time, 32 indicate inhibited zones, 86
exit time, 32 inhibit
film out, 155 allow zone inhibit, 19
fuse fail, 154 auto uninhibit on disarm, 73
how to trigger, 179 disable auto uninhibit, 54
inhibited, 31 inhibit zone tamper, 79
keypad buzzer, 156 prevent arming if all inhibited, 35
linking to outputs, 124 report inhibits, 99
local alarm, 31 zone shunting, 133
low battery, 154 inhibit alarm report on exit fault, 82
mains fail, 154 inhibit external siren and strobe for disarm
make event flags 24-hour, 24 tamper, 83
pre-alarm, 32 installer dual code, 84
predefined event flags, 180 interconnection fault
RAS offline, 155 override, 91
report failure, 156 internal siren, 92
shunt event flag, 134 internal siren event flag, 23
shunt warning, 134 internal siren set to, 65
siren fail, 155 ISDN
system events, 154 MSN number, 94
system tamper, 154 ISDN point to point, 95

214 Advisor Master Programming Guide

K O
keybox time, 35 opening doors. See door control
keypad duress output controller
activating with a code, 53 number fitted to control panel, 71
remote arming station output, 40
L troubleshooting, 198
outputs. See event to output
latch jam and supervision, 87 override battery fault, 90
latch mains/battery/line faults, 87 override detector fault, 90
latched reset event flag, 33 override DGP fault, 91
LCD override interconnection fault, 91
rotation delay, 72 override mains fault, 90
text rotation speed, 73 override RAS fault, 91
LED test, 112 override signalling fault, 90
local alarm, 91 override siren fault, 90
lockout, 44, 47, 88 override tamper, 91
lockout time, 68
low battery event flag, 154
P
M PA siren, 87
panic alarm event flag, 36
macros. See program macro logic part set access to EE, 37
mains fail part set entry time, 37
time before reporting to central station, 66 part set exit buzzer, 37
mains fault part set exit time, 36
override, 90 part set external siren, 37
maintenance. See program next service part set reporting, 38
menu options perform engineering reset, 80
explanation of the LCD display, 5 PIN, 58
how to program, 5 lockout RAS on wrong codes, 44
how to program values, 5 PIN of the day, 89, 92
how to program YES/NO options, 5 access time, 69
moving around between them, 5 poll errors, 138
programming, 5 polling
modem access DGP database, 48
accessing panel, 56 remote arming stations, 39
view poll errors, 138
N postpone automatic arming, 127
name printer, 148
alarm group restriction, 120 enable real-time printer, 148
alarm groups, 52 print access control events, 148
areas, 29 print alarm events, 148
zone, 17 print data outside timezone, 149
zone event text, 72 print door open/close, 136
NFA2P, 84 print zones on activation, 26
number printer options, 149
alarm group restriction, 120 timezone to print, 149
alarm groups, 50 troubleshooting, 198
areas, 29 program macro logic, 160
auto arm/disarm, 126 define the logic equation, 162
output, 124 macro number, 160
program macro logic, 160 macro output operation, 161
shunt timer, 133 set the logical operator, 162
timezone, 114 specify if the macro output triggers an event
zone, 7 flag or a zone, 161
time period for macro output, 161
use macro inputs to set up logic equations,
162
what will the result of the logic equation do,
161

Advisor Master Programming Guide 215

program next service, 153 reporting, 182
enter next service date, 153 A&B alarm (ACPO), 35
text displayed on service date, 153 account codes per area, 98
program text, 103 allow audio listen in (CS), 99
programming area (opening/closing), 34
how to program, 5 audio listen in (area), 34
programming four-door/four-lift DGP or one- audio listen in (zones), 19
door RAS, 141 class database, 164
programming menu delay disarmed alarms, 64
accessing, 4 delay for entry/exit alarms, 66
explanation of the LCD display, 5 delay for mains failure, 66
master engineer code, 4 dual reporting, 99
moving around between the menu options, exit fault, 35
5 fail to report event flag, 156
list of events being reporting by zones, 182
R list of reported system events for large
reporting, 192
random key, 89 list of reported system events for small
RAS. See remote arming stations reporting, 190
lockout, 88 multiple alarms, 79
RAS fault multiple restores, 79
override, 91 program account codes, 98
RAS lockout, 68 program central station phone nbrs, 98
remote arming stations, 39 report inhibits, 99
alarm control when using cards, 41 select reporting format for central station,
alarm control with one key, 43 97
alarm group, 50 SIA uses 3 digit extensions, 95
alarm group restrictions, 120 test calls, 166
alarm group restrictions only disarm, 44 use Bell or CCITT for SIA, 99
area alarm group, 39 zones to central station, 18
buzzer for entry/exit, 44 reporting formats, 97
cards always arm/disarm, 43 reset alarm
cards auto disarm, 43 when using cards, 41
code tamper, 47 without PIN, 44
disable flashing area LEDs, 76 reset the control panel, 116
disable status LEDs, 45 response code, 89
display alarms immediately, 77
display shunted zone, 43
S
enable chime, 47
enable polling, 39 Scandinavian indicators, 67, 85
Enter key operation, 42 screen saver timeout time, 67
LCD arming station, 41 secure code, 89
lockout, 47 security grade, 86
lockout RAS on wrong codes, 44 security password, 145
menu alarm group, 40 select the central station to program, 97
offline, 39 sending arming after exit, 81
online, 39 service. See program next service
output controller, 40 time to service the system, 64
overview of options available, 41 timezone 25, 113
program 1-door RAS, 141 SIA area modifier, 101
program to open a door, 40 SIA reporting with 3 digit extensions, 95
RAS offline event flag, 155 signalling fault
reset alarm without PIN, 44 override, 90
screensaver, 47 siren
troubleshooting, 196 activate on system alarm, 74
unlock door on alarm code, 42 activated when panel fails to report to
view poll errors, 138 central station, 77
report line fault, 97 calibration, 178
report mains fault, 96 delay, 66
fault, 178

216 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 fault override, 90 duress operation mode, 81
testing during arm test, 75 enable user name prompt, 74
siren delay set to, 66 engineer reset for system alarms, 79
siren fault override, 90 engineer reset for system tampers, 80
siren type, 82 film low level (camera), 70
site code. See system code film out level (camera), 71
soak test days, 83 financial options, 77
standard DGP inhibit zone tamper, 79
set type of DGP, 49 latching system alarms, 74
suppress FTC for voice reporting, 100 number of output controllers, 71
synchronize users records, 88 report multiple alarms, 79
system code, 131 report multiple restores, 79
display last card, 140 reset cameras with 0, Enter, 75
program the card ID offset, 131 select dual or single zone monitoring, 73
program the system code, 131 set LCD text rotation delay, 72
system event flags, 154 siren testing during arm test, 75
all areas armed event flag, 156 sirens only activate after fail to report, 77
all armed pulse event flag, 157 system alarms activate siren and strobe, 74
battery test active, 157 test mode, 71
computer connection active, 157 text rotation speed, 73
DGP isolated event flag, 155 two users needed before programming
DGP offline event flag, 155 codes, 76
dialler active system event flag, 156 zone event text, 72
duress event flag, 155 zone expansion fitted, 78
engineer walk test, 157
engineer walk test reset, 157 T
external siren test event flag, 156
film out event flag, 155 tamper
fuse fail event flag, 154 override, 91
keypad buzzer event flag, 156 telephone number
line fault, 157 callback, 145
low battery event flag, 154 central stations, 98
mains fail event flag, 154 computer, 145
panel CPU restart, 159 MSN, 94
panic alarm, 158 PABX, 94
RAS isolated, 158 service, 145
RAS offline event flag, 155 test calls, 166
report failure, 156 report test calls only if no reporting during
siren fail event flag, 155 interval, 166
system A (ACPO), 158 set the time to report test call, 166
system B (ACPO), 158 specify test call interval, 166
system tamper event flag, 154 test option
test mode event flag, 156 automatic testing of zones, 21
user walk test, 158 list of test types, 21
user walk test reset, 158 testing
system events activating event flags, 154 battery, 151
system options, 70 LED's, 112
alarm code prefix, 72 testing event flag activation time, 65
areas for total disarm, 70 view poll errors, 138
auto uninhibit on disarm, 73 text words, 103
define the end-of-line resistor used, 81 alarm group restrictions, 120
delayed disarmed alarm lockout, 78 area name, 29
disable auto insert of alarm group how to program, 103
restrictions, 75 keypad layout for entering text, 104
disable flashing area LEDs, 76 list of pre-programmed words in the library,
disable user codes from displaying, 76 105
disarming 24 hr zones, 70 program zone event text, 72
display alarms immediately, 77 zone name, 17
display user flags, 78 timed lockout by wrong badges, 47
display zones with zone names, 74

Advisor Master Programming Guide 217

timers, 62 selecting options, 59
A to B alarm delay (ACPO), 66 two users needed before programming
accuracy of timers, 62 codes, 76
camera suspicion time, 64 user can override line fault, 61
delay time for reporting entry/exit alarms, user level, 60
66 user offset, 81
delayed disarmed alarm time, 64 user walk test, 27
disarmed time (alarm group restriction), 62,
119 V
local alarm reminder time, 64
mains fail delay time, 66 vaults, 75
testing event flag time, 65 version, 111
time to perform a disarm test, 63 how to get version numbers, 111
time to perform an arm test, 63 voice reporting, 170
time to service the system, 64 reporting code numbers, 170
time to test a zone, 65 voice message description, 171
unlock time, 65 voice message number, 171
warning time, 63
warning time (alarm group restriction), 119 W
timezone to follow output, 137 word library, 103
assign output to follow, 137 wrong badge, 47
program timezone, 137
timezones, 113
X
alarm groups, 50
area out of hours, 34 X25 account code, 100
assign to alarm group, 59 X25 line type, 100
auto arm/disarm, 126 X25 TEI value, 96
available to four-door/four-lift DGP's, 137 X-SIA max characters, 100
controlling an output, 125
hard timezones, 113 Z
number, 114
operation during holidays, 113 zone database, 7
program end time, 114 alarm group, 21
program start time, 114 allow zone inhibit, 19
selecting days of week and holidays, 115 area, 20
soft timezone, 137 camera count zone types and film level, 70
soft timezones, 113 common area, 20
timezone 25 (service tech enabled), 113 define the end-of-line resistor used, 81
to remote devices, 141 engineer reset (alarm), 19
troubleshooting engineer reset (tamper), 19
ATS1802 printer interface, 198 entry/exit time, 29, 30
data gathering panels (ATS1201/1210, 197 event flags activated by zones, 22
LCD arming stations (ATS110x, ATS112x), keypad buzzer, 24
196 make event flags 24 hr, 24
LED arming stations (ATS115x), 196 print on activation, 26
output devices (ATS181x, ATS1820), 198 specify reporting class database, 164
test procedure for zones, 21
trigger chime/camera event flag, 26
U
trigger zone event flag, 25
up/download. See computer connection using audio listen in, 19
user zone name, 17
adding digits to code for alarm control, 72 zone number, 7
alarm group restrictions, 118 zone type, 7
disable user codes from displaying, 76 zone number
display one zone at a time, 74 description, 7
display user flags, 78 zone shunts, 133
display zones with zone names, 74 cancel door event flag, 135
enable user name prompt, 74 door open command starts shunt, 134
no arming possible, 57 door shunted when disarmed, 135
program menu options, 59 door shunted while armed, 135

218 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 entry/exit shunting, 136 zone type
program the output to start the shunting, armed/disarmed, 7
133 entry/exit time, 7
program the time to shunt, 134 programming, 7
program the warning time, 134 tamper alarm, 7
program zones to shunt, 133 zones. See zone database
report door open/close, 136 armed/disarmed, 7
shunt event flag, 134 entry/exit time, 7, 29, 30
shunt timer number, 133 number, 7
shunt warning event flag, 134 shunt, 133
zone holds event flag for two seconds, 136 tamper alarms, 7
zone test, 175

Advisor Master Programming Guide 219

Programming map
Simple/Advanced Menu Legend:
*-Advanced Simple menu
Advanced menu
1-Zone database
Zone number
Zone type Trigger EF 2, armed alarm
Zone name Trigger EF 3, armed alarm
Reporting of zone Trigger EF 4, armed alarm
Report alarm to CS 1 Trigger EF 5, armed alarm
Report alarm to CS 2 Trigger EF 6, disarmed alarm
Report alarm to CS 3 Trigger EF 7, disarmed alarm
Report alarm to CS 4 Trigger EF 8, 24 hr alarm
Enable audio listen in Trigger EF 9, armed alarm
Engineer Reset on Alarm Trigger EF 10, armed alarm
Engineer reset for tampers Trigger EF 11, armed alarm
Disable inhibit Trigger zone EF if active
Enable soak test Trigger chime/camera EF in area DB
Area / alarm group assignment Print zone when active
Test option Engineer walk test
Zone event flag Double Knock
Internal siren event flag User walk test
External siren event flag Anti-mask detector
Keypad buzzer Part set zone
Make all events 24 hour

2-Area database
Select the area to program
Area name Report to Central Station 2
Exit time Report to Central Station 3
Entry time Report to Central Station 4
External siren event flag Enable audio listen in
Internal siren event flag Enable exit fault reporting
Area disarmed event flag A&B alarm reporting (ACPO)
Area active event flag Disable arming if all inhibited
Inhibited event flag KeyBox time (min)
Armed Alarm event flag Area tamper alarm event flag
Disarmed alarm event flag Arm complete event flag
Local alarm event flag Disarm complete event flag
Exit timer event flag Alert indicator event flag
Entry timer event flag Panic alarm event flag
Warning timer event flag Anti-mask/fault event flag
Chime/camera event flag Part set exit time
Pre-alarm timer event flag Part set entry time
Anti-mask reset event flag Part set exit buzzer
Latched reset event flag Part set external siren
Alarm-A event flag Part set access to E/E
Alarm-B event flag Enable part set reporting
Out-of-hours timezone Disable part set B-alarms
Area disarmed time Chime on RAS
Report to Central Station 1


220 Advisor Master Programming Guide

3-RAS database
RAS to be polled
Select RAS to program
Area alarm group AG restriction disarm only
Menu alarm group Entry/exit buzzers
Door event flag Timed lockout by wrong codes
Chime event flag Cards arm after 3 badges
Output controller assigned Disable status LED's
LCD arming station 3 LED RAS
Toggle Area status Card & PIN (disarm only)
Enter key opens door only RAS tamper (ACPO) area
Door event flag on alarm codes Card & PIN (always)
Display shunted zone on LCD Enter unlocks screensaver
Arm/disarm using one key RAS code tamper event flag
Cards auto disarm Enable chime
Card always arms/disarms Timed lockout by wrong badges
Reset from RAS without code

4-DGP database
DGPs to be polled
DGP type
DGP Tamper (ACPO) Area
DGP battery test event flag

5-Alarm groups
Alarm group number
Alarm group name Modem access
Areas assigned Alarm group restriction 1
User alarm group Alarm group restriction 2
Alarm system control Alarm group restriction 3
List of areas Alarm group restriction 4
Keypad duress Alarm group restriction 5
Reset system alarm Alarm group restriction 6
Disable auto-uninhibit AlmGrp restriction 7, Emergency
Restricted To Arm & Reset AlmGrp restriction 8, Counter
Disarm only No arming if restriction not timing
Alarm reset only Change own PIN only
Auto inhibit active zones Allow Stop Voice reporting
Forced arming when active Timezone
Prevent forced disarming Alternate alarm group

User menu options:

1. Panel Status 10. Inhibit Zone 19. Installer Programming
2. Active Zones 11. Uninhibit Zone 20. Door and Floor Groups
3. Zones In Alarm 12. Test Zone 21. Holidays
4. Inhibited Zones 13. Start Auto Disarm Test 22. Open Door
5. History 14. Program Users 23. Unlock,Lock,Disable,Enable
6. Test Report 15. Time & Date 24. Print History
7. Service Menu 16. Isolate/De-isolate RAS/DGP 25. TML Menu Entry
8. Film Counters 17. Authorization Sevice In 26. Chime options
9. List Zone Names 18. Reset Cameras 27. HSR management


Advisor Master Programming Guide 221

6-Timers
AG restriction 1 disarmed time Internal siren set to
AG restriction 2 disarmed time Siren delay set to
AG restriction 3 disarmed time Mains fail delay time
AG restriction 4 disarmed time Delay reporting alarms for
AG restriction 5 disarmed time A to B alarm delay (ACPO)
AG restriction 6 disarmed time Screensaver timeout time
AG restriction 7 disarmed time RAS card & PIN timeout
AG restriction 8 disarmed time Double knock interval (min)
Disarm test time Double knock duration (sec)
Arm test time Reserved
Warning time Arm complete time (sec)
Disarmed alarm delay time Disarm complete time (sec)
Suspicion time Abort time (sec)
Service time available RAS lockout time
Local alarm reminder time Chime time is set to
Individual zone test time Reserved
Doors unlock time Computer access time
Testing event flag time Access time for PIN of the day
External siren set to

7-System options
Areas selected for total disarm Inhibit alarm report on exit fault
Film low level Disable tamper report in disarm
Film out level Inhibit ext.sir&strobe for disarm tamper
Test mode ATS system code
No. of output controllers Soak test days
Zone event text ACPO
Alarm code prefix EE confirm disable (ACPO)
LCD rotation delay Engineer reset on ACPO zone B alarm
LCD rotation speed NFA2P
Dual zone Installer dual code
Auto uninhibit on disarm Enable buzzer on mains/line fault
Display one zone at a time Enable "Call Central Station" display
Username file Scandinavian indicators
System alarms set siren and strobe Enable log limitations
Latching system alarms Indicate inhibited zones
Siren testing Confirm area
Disable "0, ENTER" for camera reset Eng Rst on ACPO zone B tamper
Disable insert of AG restriction Eng Rst on ACPO system B tamper
Reserved Security grade
Disable code from displaying Ignore AC mains fault when arming
Disable flashing area LEDs Latch mains/battery/line faults
Two users before programming code Enable PA siren on FTC
Display alarms instantly on LCD Latch AWDGP jam and supervision
Sirens only after FTC Enable chime
Financial options Synchronize DGP users records
Display user flags Engineer reset on RAS lockout
Delayed disarmed alarm lockout Prevent arming on faults
Zone expansion fitted PIN of the day option
Inhibit zone tamper Override AC mains fail
Report multiple alarms Override battery fault
Report multiple restores Override signalling fault
Engineer reset for system alarms Override siren fail
Engineer reset for system tampers Override detector trouble
Ignore battery fault when arming Override tamper
 User can do engineering reset Override interconnection fault

222 Advisor Master Programming Guide

 Engineer entry protect Override RAS fault
Send arming after exit Override DGP fault
User offset Enable buzzer on alerts
End of line resistor code Internal siren on exit fault
Duress mode Number of attempts for PIN of the day
Siren Type

8-Auto reset
Auto reset time
Reset alarm group

9-Communication options
PABX number Select the reporting format
MSN number Enter the 1st phone number
Dial tone detection Enter the 2nd phone number
Select tone dialling System account number
Enable PSTN line fault monitor Area account numbers
Monitor service tones Use BELL modem tones
Use 3 digit SIA extensions Dual reporting
ISDN point to point Allow audio listen in
Enable ISDN line fault monitor Disable reporting of inhibits
200 baud reverse area OP/CL Reserved
X25 TEI value X-SIA max characters
Audio listen in time X25 account code
Audio listen in frame X25 line type
Report mains fault Connection type
Report line fault Suppress FTC for voice
GSM line fault Retry counter
Select the central station
SIA area modifier
X25 D-Bit
Mains fail reporting delay [min]
Enable IP line fault monitor
AWDGP reporting codes for IMQ

10-Program text Program text words

11-Version Select device

12-LED test

13-Timezones
Select timezone
Program start time, hours Program end time, minutes
Program start time, minutes Days
Program end time, hours

14-Defaults Select default option

15-Alarm group restrictions

Restriction number
Alarm group restriction name 1st alternate areas to arm/reset
Timed disarm areas 2nd alternate timed disarm area
Areas to arm/reset 2nd alternate areas to arm/reset
1st alternate timed disarm area


Advisor Master Programming Guide 223

16-Event to output
Output number
Event flag number Active or inactive during timezone
Timezone to control output Invert output

17-Auto arm/disarm
Auto arm/disarm program
Timezone to arm/disarm Alarm group to auto arm/disarm

18-Vaults

19-Area linking Linking areas

20-System codes
System code 1 System code 2
Card offset 1 Card offset 2

21-Zone shunts
Shunt timer number
Zone number to shunt Shunt zone when disarmed
Output number to start shunt Shunt zone when armed
Shunt time Cancel door event flag
Shunt warning time Zone holds event flag for 2 seconds
Shunt event flag Entry/exit shunting
Shunt warning event flag Log door open/close
Door open command starts shunt

22-Timezone to follow output Select timezone Assign output to follow

23-Poll errors Select device type

24-Download to remote device

Select download option
Display download status Download all

25-Display last card

26-Reserved menu

27-Reserved menu

28-To remote devices

Select the device type Select the device to program

29-Computer connection
Enable remote up/download Computer address
Up/download if any area armed Security password
Enable remote control Connection attempts
Remote control if any area armed Number of rings before answering
Use modem init string Number of calls before answering
Enter modem init string Answering machine defeat
Report alarms to computer Reserved
Report access events Use Bell 103 protocol
Computer telephone number Connection type
Up/Download callback number Authorize computer connection
Service telephone number


224 Advisor Master Programming Guide

30-Printer
Enable real-time printer Print data outside timezone
Print alarm events Print during timezone
Print access control events Printer options

31-Battery testing
Select battery test program Select battery test
Battery test frequency Manual battery test
Start battery test Battery test report
Battery test period Select DGP for battery test

32-Custom LCD message

33-Program next service

Maintenance date Maintenance message

34-Program system event flags

Mains fail event flag Dialler active system event flag
Low battery event flag External siren test event flag
Fuse fail event flag All armed pulse event flag
Tamper event Flag Computer connection active
Siren fail event flag Line fault
DGP isolated event flag Battery test active
DGP offline event flag Engineer walk test
RAS offline event flag Engineer walk test reset
Duress event Flag System A (ACPO)
Film out event Flag System B (ACPO)
Report fail event flag User walk test
Test mode event flag User walk test reset
All armed event flag Panic alarm
Keypad buzzer event flag RAS isolated
Not in use Panel CPU restart
Not in use

35-Program macro logic

Program number
Macro output function
Time
Macro output triggers EF or zone
Macro inputs
Macro logic equation

36 to 41-Reserved menus

42-Reporting class database

Select the reporting class
Select the class condition
Report to Central Station 1
Report to Central Station 2
Report to Central Station 3
Report to Central Station 4
Enable Audio Listen in for this condition


Advisor Master Programming Guide 225

43-Test calls
Start test call
Test call interval
Extend test call

44 to 49-Reserved menus

50-Channel mapping
Inputs Input group 1-16

Areas Area group 1 to 8

System System group 1 to 10

51-Engineering reset

52-Voice reporting

53-Program DVMRe
DVMRe alarm input map Enable event text insertion
Enable DVMRe interface Enable alarm feedback
Enable time update Enable history Search and Play

54-Test zone

55-Reserved

56-Siren calibration

226 Advisor Master Programming Guide